< Назад | Содержимое | Далее >
ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Engine Controls and Fuel - 1.5L (L3A) - Diagnostic Information and Procedures - Volt
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES
DTC P0446: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) VENT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0446
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Vent System Performance
Typical Scan Tool Data
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Signal Voltage |
Fuel Tank Pressure |
2.67 V |
Atmospheric Pressure/BARO |
Less than 1.5 V |
Positive Pressure |
More than 1.5 V |
Negative Pressure/Vacuum |
Circuit/System Description
This DTC tests the evaporative emission (EVAP) system for a restricted or blocked EVAP vent path. There are two parts to this test.
Part one uses the fuel tank pressure sensor to indicate vacuum comes within a calibrated range within a calibrated time.
The second part of this test looks for excessive vacuum which would indicate a restriction. The duration of this second part of is a function of purge volume through the system.
The table listed below illustrates the relationship between the ON and OFF states, and the OPEN or CLOSED states of the EVAP purge and vent solenoid valves.
ECM Command |
EVAP Purge Solenoid Valve |
EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve |
ON (Venting) |
Open |
Open, Venting |
OFF (Not Venting) |
Closed |
Closed, Not Venting |
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P00C8, P00C9, P00CA, P0068, P0071, P0072, P0073 P0090, P0091, P0092, P0442, P0443, P0449, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0458, P0459, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0497, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P0606, P0722, P0723, P0191, P0192, P0193, P06A3, P06DB, P06D2, P06DE, P0A1D,
P0601, P0604, P0697, P145D, P145E, P160D, P160E, P1682, P16A0, P16A1, P16A2, P16A7, P16F3, P1104, P127A, P127C, P127D, P15F2, P1221, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2100, P2101, P2102, P2103, P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, P215B, P2176, P2227, P2228, P2229, P2230, P228C, P228D, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2422, P2450, P24B9, P24BA, P24BB, U0073,
U0074, U0293, U1817 are not set.
The EVAP purge solenoid is open.
The EVAP vent solenoid is open.
The EVAP leak detection pump is OFF.
The vehicle service mode voltage is greater than 11 V.
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The outside air temperature is between 4 - 35°C (39 - 95°F).
The engine RPM to enable is between 1500 - 3400.
The engine RPM to re-enable is between 1500 - 3300.
The engine vacuum to enable is between 15 - 56 kPa (2.1 - 8.1 PSI).
The engine vacuum to re-enable is between 16 - 54 kPa (2.3 - 7.8 PSI).
The engine airflow to enable is between 5 - 29 g/s.
The engine airflow to re-enable is between 6 - 27 g/s.
The purge flow to enable is greater than 0.17 g/s.
The purge flow to re-enable is greater than 0.18 g/s.
The purge duty cycle to enable is greater than 15%.
The purge duty cycle to re-enable is greater than 16%.
The requested purge flow to enable is greater than 2.94%.
The delivered purge flow to re-enable is greater than 2.89%.
The delivered purge flow to enable is greater than 2.06%.
The engine is running.
The purge is enabled.
The refueling request button is not pressed.
The device control is less than 0.5 s.
The fuel tank protection is not active.
This test will start and run once per trip when propulsion system is active and engine is On. DTC P0497 has run and passed.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
If fuel tank pressure sensor reading is less than -13 in H2O (-3.24 kPa) of vacuum for 5 s
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P0446 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC
DTC P0446 is a Type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent condition could be caused by:
A damaged EVAP vent housing
A temporary blockage at the EVAP vent solenoid valve inlet
Pinched vent hose
A blockage in the vent system may also cause a poor fuel fill problem.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information Special Tools
CH-41415-30 Fuel Tank Cap Adapter
GE-41413-A Evaporative Emissions System Tester
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode
2. Verify DTC P0449 is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If the DTC is not set
3. Vehicle OFF, remove the fuel tank filler cap. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify that the Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor voltage parameter is between 2.0 - 3.0 V.
If not between the 2.0 - 3.0 V
Refer to DTC P0451-P0453.
If between the 2.0 - 3.0 V
5. Install the fuel tank filler cap, engine Running at operating temperature for 5 min,
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameter does not increase to greater than 0.29 V when commanding the EVAP Purge Solenoid Valve to 50%.
If greater than 2.5 V
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If 2.5 V or less
7. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
8. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with the Circuit/System Testing.
1. Verify a blockage or restriction does not exist in the EVAP system components listed below.
Evaporative Emission Vent System Hoses
Evaporative Emission Canister
Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
Evaporative Emission Vent Filter
If a condition exists
Repair or replace the component as necessary
If none of the conditions exist
2. Reconnect all previously disconnected EVAP hardware.
NOTE: Refer to the GE-41413-A operation manual for detailed instructions in Evaporative Emission Control System Diagnosis.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap and connect the CH-41415-30 to the fuel tank filler neck. Connect the
GE-41413-A to the CH-41415-30 .
4. Turn the nitrogen/smoke valve on the GE-41413-A to nitrogen.
NOTE: DO NOT exceed the specified value in this step. Exceeding the specified value may produce incorrect test results.
5. Use the remote switch to activate the GE-41413-A and pressurize the fuel tank to 5.0 in H2O (1.24 kPa).
6. Vehicle in Service Mode
7. Verify the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameter is 0 in H2O (0 kPa) when commanding the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve to ON (Venting).
If not 0 in H2O
Test for a blockage or a restriction in the EVAP vent hose or inlet. If the inlet or hose test normal, replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
If 0 in H2O
8. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
If the DTC sets
Refer to step 1 above.
If the DTC does not set
9. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Replacement
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
DTC P0449, P0498, OR P0499: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) VENT SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review
Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P0449
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Vent Solenoid Valve Control Circuit
DTC P0498
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Vent Solenoid Valve Control Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0499
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Vent Solenoid Valve Control Circuit High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
B+ |
P0498 |
P0449, P0498 |
- |
Control |
P0498 |
P0449 |
P0499 |
Circuit/System Description
The EVAP vent solenoid valve controls fresh airflow into the EVAP canister. Battery voltage is supplied to the normally closed evaporative emission (EVAP) vent solenoid valve. The ECM grounds the EVAP vent solenoid valve control circuit through an internal switch called a driver. The ECM monitors the status of the driver. The driver is equipped with a feedback circuit that is pulled-up to a voltage. The ECM can determine if the control circuit is open, shorted to ground, or shorted to a voltage by monitoring the feedback voltage.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P0449, P0498 and P0499 run continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match for greater than 5 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P0449, P0498 and P0499 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P0449, P0498 and P0499 are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
Where multiple DTCs set look for a common root cause like battery feeds, grounds, splices, etc.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, command the EVAP vent solenoid valve to Venting and Not Venting with a scan tool. Listen or feel for a click when the valve operates.
No click heard or felt
Refer to Circuit/System testing
Click heard or felt
2. Command the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve to Venting and Not Venting with a scan tool
3. Verify the following scan tool parameters listed below do not display Malfunction :
EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Output Circuit High Voltage Test Status
EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Output Circuit Open Test Status
EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Output Circuit Low Voltage Test Status
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If Malfunction is not displayed
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal A or 2 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, test all components connected to the B+ circuit for a short and replace as necessary.
If the test lamp illuminates
4. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the B+ circuit terminal A or 2 and the control circuit terminal B or 1.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
5. Remove the test lamp.
6. Verify the scan tool EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Control Circuit High Voltage Test Status parameter displays OK when commanding the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve to Venting with a scan tool.
If OK is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If OK is displayed
7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal B or 1 and the B+ circuit terminal A or 2.
8. Verify the scan tool EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Control Circuit High Voltage Test Status parameter displays Malfunction when commanding the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve to Venting with a scan tool.
If Malfunction is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If Malfunction is displayed
9. Test or replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
2. Test for 10-30 Ω between the control terminal B or 1 and the B+ circuit terminal A or 2.
If not between 10-30 Ω
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
If between 10-30 Ω
3. Test for no air flow through the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve by applying vacuum to the pump side of the valve. It should hold 1 - 2 in. Hg (3 - 7 kPa) for 30 s.
If not within the specified range
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
If within the specified range
4. Jumper:
The control terminal B or 1 to ground
The B+ circuit terminal A or 2 to 12 V battery voltage
5. Apply vacuum to the pump side of the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve. It should not hold vacuum.
If it does hold vacuum
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
If it does not hold vacuum
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P0451-P0453: FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P0451
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Performance
DTC P0452
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0453
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
5 V Reference |
P0452, P0532, P0641 |
P0452 |
P0453, P0533, P0641 * |
- |
Signal |
P0452 |
P0452 |
P0453 * |
- |
Low Reference |
- |
P0453, P0463, P1458, P145A |
- |
- |
* Internal ECM or fuel tank pressure sensor damage may occur if the circuit is shorted to B+. |
Typical Scan Tool Data
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: Vehicle in Service Mode |
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Parameter Normal Range: 0.15 - 4.85 V |
|||
5 V Reference |
0 V |
0 - 1.5 V |
5 V |
Signal |
0 V |
0 V |
3 - 5 V |
Low Reference |
- |
4 - 5 V |
- |
Circuit/System Description
The fuel tank pressure sensor measures the pressure or vacuum in the evaporative emission (EVAP) system. The engine control module (ECM) supplies a 5 V reference and a low reference circuit to the fuel tank pressure sensor. The fuel tank pressure sensor signal voltage varies depending on EVAP system pressure or vacuum.
The following tables illustrate relationship examples between the fuel tank pressure sensor and the ON and OFF states, and the OPEN or CLOSED states of the EVAP components.
Fuel Tank Pressure Relationship
Fuel Tank Pressure |
Fuel Tank Pressure in. H2O/PSI |
Fuel Tank Pressure Signal Voltage |
Pressure |
Positive Value, 14.9 in H2O/0.54 PSI |
High, 4.73 V |
No Pressure |
Near Zero, 0 in H2O/0.001 PSI |
2.6 V |
Vacuum |
Negative Value, - 2.37 in H2O/- 0.08 PSI |
Low, 2.3 V |
Fuel Tank Pressure to EVAP Leak Detection Pump Assembly Relationship
Fuel Tank Pressure |
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor |
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switch Valve |
Vent Valve |
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure |
Pressure or Vacuum |
Positive or Negative Value |
Vent |
Closed |
100 kPa (14.50 PSI) * |
Vacuum |
Negative Value -1 kPa (0.15 PSI) |
Pump/Not Venting |
Open |
99 kPa (14.36 PSI) ** |
Pressure |
Positive Value -3 kPa (0.44 PSI) |
Pump/Not Venting |
Open |
103 kPa (14.94 PSI) ** |
* Equivalent to barometric pressure reading. ** The values are examples only. Your readings may vary from this depending on the pressure or vacuum in the system and barometric pressure. |
Conditions for Running the DTC
P0451 - Condition 1:
DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0128, P012B, P012C, P012D, P0222, P0223, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P06E4, P0722, P0723, P1221, P1459, P145A, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, U0140, U182D, U0073, U0074,
P2537 or P2610 is not set.
DTC P1458 or P145D are not present when the test failed this ignition cycle.
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The fuel level is between 10 - 90%.
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is less than 40°C (104°F).
The intake air temperature (IAT) is between 4° - 45°C (39° - 113°F).
The propulsion system is not active.
The vehicle is OFF.
The service bay test is not active.
The refueling request button is not pressed.
The battery voltage is greater than 10 V.
The vehicle speed is less than 1.6 km/h (1 MPH).
There are three possible time windows for this test to run. Up to that point and through this time period the propulsion system must not be active. These time windows are: 5.0, 7.0 or 9.5 h.
The DTC runs once per drive cycle and immediately after a code clear when the above conditions are met.
P0451 - Condition 2:
DTCs P0068, P0071, P0072, P0073, P010C, P010D, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P012B, P012C, P012D, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P0442, P0443, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0458, P0459, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P0722, P0723, P0606, P1104, P1221, P145A, P145D, P145E, P1458, P1459, P16F3, P2100, P2101, P2102, P2103, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2422 or P2450 is not set.
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The outside air temperature (OAT) is between 4° - 35°C (39 - 102°F).
The engine is running.
The run/crank voltage is greater than 11 V.
The EVAP Purge solenoid valve is not enabled.
The refueling request button is not pressed.
The DTC runs once per drive cycle when the above conditions are met.
P0452 and P0453
Vehicle ON or the engine is running.
DTCs P0452 and P0453 run continually when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P0451
The ECM detects the difference between the fuel tank pressure sensor and the EVAP leak detection pump pressure is greater than 0.747 kPa (0.11 PSI) for greater than 5 s.
P0452
The ECM detects the fuel tank pressure sensor voltage is less than 0.15 V for greater than 8 s.
P0453
The ECM detects the fuel tank pressure sensor voltage is greater than 4.85 V for greater than 8 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P0451, P0452 and P0453 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P0451, P0452 and P0453 are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
A restriction in the EVAP canister or vent lines that keeps the fuel tank pressure and EVAP leak detection pump sensor from comparing each others value.
Since this is a sealed system there could be a pressure or vacuum existing in the system.
A vent valve stuck closed will affect performance.
A switching valve stuck in the vent position will affect performance.
Ensure that the reference port on the fuel tank pressure sensor is unobstructed.
In a sealed system a condition where there is a lot of pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank to start with (fuel tank pressure sensor is outside readable range), in those cases (high vacuum) you will not see any fuel tank pressure sensor movement after purge is commanded on. On the pressure side, it may eventually get into the readable range, but could take significant time. Opening/venting the vent solenoid before testing can relieve any stored pressure or vacuum to help alleviate this.
A fuel tank pressure sensor that is skewed or does not have a linear transition from low to high may cause these DTC's to set. Scan tool output controls and Review Stored Data can help detect erratic sensor response. To test the sensor signal under vacuum conditions, use Review Stored Data and the EVAP Test function to capture data while commanding purge to 20%, then review stored data to look for erratic sensor operation. A similar test can be done for the pressure side of the sensor operation by applying pressure with the
GE 41413-A
while taking a snapshot.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information Special Tools
GE 41413-A Evaporative Emissions System Tester
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE:
The order of these steps is important. If not followed properly you will be bleeding off any pressure or vacuum in the system and not see any change in the EVAP leak detection pump sensor.
Read the instructions for P0451 in their entirety before proceeding to understand what is being required.
Ambient and vehicle component temperature must be above 0°C (32°F) to command the switching valve or vacuum pump. This prevents erroneous results and damage to the EVAP leak detection pump assembly.
P0451
1. Verify DTC P0449, P0498 or P0499 is not set
If the DTC sets
Refer to: DTC P0449, P0498, or P0499
If the DTC does not set
2. Verify DTC P0452 or P0453 is not set
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If the DTC does not set
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Record the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameter, pressure or vacuum.
5. Command the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve to Venting.
6. The Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameter should be 0.07 in H2O, 0.01 kPa (0.00 PSI) after 5 s.
If not within the specified range
Verify the following conditions do not exist:
A restriction in the EVAP canister or vent lines
A EVAP vent solenoid valve stuck closed
The reference port on the fuel tank pressure sensor is obstructed Repair or replace as necessary
If within specified range
7. Command the EVAP leak detection pump ON using the scan tool EVAP Test. Get the fuel tank pressure sensor parameter to -11.56 in H2O, -2.88 kPa (-0.42 PSI) or greater. This may take several seconds.
NOTE: Use of any control function other than EVAP Test will not create a vacuum in the system.
NOTE: Vacuum will decay exiting the EVAP Test and going to step 8. This is normal. There should be sufficient vacuum left to perform steps 8 and 9.
8. Record the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump and Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameters, reading one.
9. Perform each step listed below in order:
1. Select scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Test.
2. Command the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Command to Not Venting.
3. Wait for 3 s.
4. Command the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Command ON.
NOTE: Wait for 15 s while observing the parameters then click the pause button on the scan tool to retain the parameters.
10. Record the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump and Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameters, reading two.
11. Press the scan tool Release Control button after recording the parameters.
NOTE: The subtraction results and Fuel Tank Pressure parameter should be negative since a vacuum was pulled on the system.
12. Subtract the EVAP leak detection pump reading 2 from EVAP leak detection pump reading 1. This value equals what the fuel tank pressure sensor, reading two, should be (EVAP leak detection pump reading 2 -
EVAP leak detection pump reading 1 = fuel tank pressure reading 2). The fuel tank pressure sensor should be within 3 in H2O, 0.749 kPa (0.11 PSI) of the subtraction just performed.
If not within the specified range
Verify the following conditions do not exist:
A restriction in the EVAP canister or vent lines
A EVAP vent solenoid valve stuck closed
The reference port on the fuel tank pressure sensor is obstructed Repair or replace as necessary
If within the specified range
13. All OK.
P0452 and P0453
1. Request a refueling event.
2. Remove the fuel cap.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameter. It should be 2.67 V at 0 kPa (0 PSI).
If not within the specified range
Refer to circuit/system testing.
If within the specified range
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Testing for steps 2 - 6 is performed on the ECM side of the harness connector.
1. Vehicle OFF, all systems OFF. Disconnect the harness connector at the B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor. It may take up to for 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 5 Ω
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If between 4.8 - 5.2 V
5. Verify the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 0.2 V
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and the 5 V reference circuit terminal 3.
7. Verify the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameter is greater than 4.7 V.
If 4.7 V or less
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 4.7 V
8. Test or replace the B150 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor.
Component Testing
1. Remove the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly
2. Verify none of the conditions listed below exist:
Poor connection at the X350 or X351 harness connectors
Open or shorted 5 V reference circuit
Open or shorted sensor signal circuit
Open low reference circuit
If a condition exists
Repair as necessary.
If no conditions exist
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P0497: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM NO FLOW DURING PURGE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0497
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System No Flow During Purge
Circuit/System Description
This DTC tests for proper intake manifold vacuum flow to the evaporative emission (EVAP) system. The engine control module (ECM) opens the EVAP purge solenoid valve and the EVAP vent solenoid valve. The ECM then monitors the fuel tank pressure sensor and EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor to determine if a vacuum is being drawn on the EVAP system. If vacuum in the EVAP system is less than a predetermined value within a predetermined time, this DTC sets.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P0068, P0071, P0072, P0073, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P0442, P0443, P0449, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0458, P0459, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P0606, P0722, P0723, P16F3, P1104, P145D, P145E, P2100, P2101, P2102, P2103, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2422, P2450, P24B9, P24BA and P24BB is not set.
The EVAP purge solenoid is open.
The EVAP vent solenoid is open.
The EVAP leak detection pump is OFF.
The vehicle service mode voltage is greater than 11 V.
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The outside air temperature is between 4 - 35°C (39 - 95°F).
The engine RPM to enable is between 1500 - 3400.
The engine RPM to re-enable is between 1500 - 3300.
The engine vacuum to enable is between 15 - 56 kPa (2.1 - 8.1 PSI).
The engine vacuum to re-enable is between 16 - 54 kPa (2.3 - 7.8 PSI).
The engine airflow to enable is between 5 - 29 g/s.
The engine airflow to re-enable is between 6 - 27 g/s.
The purge flow to enable is greater than 0.17 g/s.
The purge flow to re-enable is greater than 0.18 g/s.
The purge duty cycle to enable is greater than 15%.
The purge duty cycle to re-enable is greater than 16%.
The requested purge flow to enable is greater than 2.94%.
The delivered purge flow to re-enable is greater than 2.89%.
The delivered purge flow to enable is greater than 2.06%.
The engine is running.
The purge is enabled.
The refueling request button is not pressed.
The device control is less than 0.5 s.
The fuel tank protection is not active.
This test will start and run once per trip with propulsion system active and engine is ON.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
After an initial time delay of 3 s when the fuel tank pressure sensor reading is greater than 0.39 kPa (0.056 PSI).
Or
After an initial time delay of 3 s when the fuel tank pressure sensor reading is less than 0.39 kPa (0.056 PSI), plus an EVAP leak detection pump switching valve delay time of 0.2 s.
If the EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor, gauge, indicates a vacuum change less than 2 kPa (0.29 PSI) for 20 s, then a low purge flow failure has been detected.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P0497 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC DTC P0497 is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids
A temporary blockage in the components listed below could cause an intermittent condition.
EVAP purge solenoid valve
Purge pipe
EVAP canister
A EVAP vent solenoid valve stuck closed can cause this DTC to set.
A EVAP leak detection pump switching valve stuck in the vent or pump position can cause this DTC to set.
A fuel tank fuel pump module assembly not fully seated in the fuel tank can cause this DTC to set.
A loose fuel cap can cause this DTC to set.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information Special Tools
CH-48096
EVAP Service Access Port Tool
GE-41413-A
Evaporative Emissions System Tester
GE-41413-300
EVAP Cap And Plug Kit
GE-41413-SPT
High Intensity White Light
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission Pipe Warning . CAUTION: Refer to Clean, Dry, Low Pressure Gas Source Caution .
NOTE: Refer to GE-41413-A operation manual for detailed instructions in Evaporative Emission Control System Diagnosis.
1. Verify the following conditions do not exist in the EVAP system:
A loose, missing, or damaged fuel fill cap.
A stuck closed, blocked, or restricted EVAP purge solenoid valve.
A blockage or restriction in the EVAP purge solenoid valve vacuum supply hose, purge pipe, EVAP canister or vapor pipe.
If a condition is found
Repair or replace as necessary.
If no conditions are found
CAUTION: Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission Hose/Pipe Connection Cleaning Caution .
2. Connect the CH-48096 to the EVAP purge solenoid valve.
3. Connect the GE-41413-A to CH-48096
4. Disconnect the fresh air intake tube from the EVAP leak detection pump.
5. Plug the fresh air port of the EVAP leak detection pump
6. Engine running, observe the GE-41413-A vacuum gauge and Fuel Tank Pressure parameter with a scan tool. There should be vacuum present.
If no vacuum is detected
Refer to Circuit System Testing
If vacuum is detected
7. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit System Testing
If the DTC does not set
8. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with the Circuit/System Testing.
1. The GE-41413-A should still be installed from verification.
2. Engine running, observe the vacuum gauge while commanding the EVAP Purge Solenoid Valve to Increase with the scan tool. Vacuum should be present from 10 - 100%.
If no vacuum is present
Test or replace the Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve.
If vacuum is present
3. Install the plug in the fresh air port performed in step 5 of circuit system verification.
4. Observe the Fuel Tank Pressure parameter while commanding the EVAP Purge Solenoid Valve to Increase with the scan tool. The parameter should be greater than 1.50 V within 60 s.
If less than the specified range
Repair the blocked purge path or test or replace the Q12 Evaporative Emission Purge Solenoid Valve.
If within specified range
5. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Solenoid Valve Replacement
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Replacement
Refer to
Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
DTC P050D: COLD START ROUGH IDLE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P050D
Cold Start Rough Idle
Circuit/System Description
During a cold start, the engine control module (ECM) commands dual-pulse mode during Open Loop operation to improve cold start emissions. In dual-pulse mode, the injectors are energized twice during each injection event. As with misfire diagnosis, in dual-pulse mode the ECM monitors the crankshaft position sensor and the camshaft position sensors to calculate crankshaft rotation speed. In normal operation, optimum fuel delivery during dual-pulse mode produces a steady crankshaft rotation speed. If the variations exceed a calibrated value, the code will be set.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P0010, P0011, P0013, P0014, P0020, P0021, P0023, P0024, P0090, P0091, P0092, P00C8, P00C9, P00CA, P0101-P0103, P0106-P0108, P010B, P010C, P010D, P0112, P0113, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0192, P0193, P0201-P0204, P0205, P0206, P0207, P0208, P0222, P0223, P0261, P0262, P0264, P0265, P0267, P0268, P0270, P0271, P0273, P0274, P0276, P0277, P0279, P0280, P0282, P0283, P0335, P0336, P0351-P0354, P0355, P0356, P0357, P0358, P0502, P0503, P0506, P0507, P05CC, P05CD, P05CE, P05CF, P0627, P0628, P0629, P0697, P06A3, P0722, P0723, P0806, P0807, P0808, P111E, P1248, P1249, P124A, P127C, P127D, P124B, P128A, P128B, P128F, P16A0, P16A1, P16A2, P16E4, P16E5, P16F3, P182E, P1824, P182A, P182B, P182C, P182D, P182F, P1838, P1839, P1840, P1841, P18B5, P18B6, P18B7, P18B8, P18B9, P18BA, P18BB, P18BC, P18BD, P18BE, P18BF, P18C0, P18C1, P18C2, P18C3, P1915, P2088, P2089, P2090, P2091, P2092, P2093, P2094, P2095, P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, P2135, P2138, P2147, P2148, P2150, P2151, P2153, P2154, P2156, P2157, P216B, P216C, P216E, P216F, P217B, P217C, P217E, P217F, P1248, P1249, P124A, P124B, P124C, P124D, P124E, P124F, P2300, P2301, P2303, P2304, P2306, P2307, P2309, P2310, P2312, P2313, P2315, P2316, P2318, P2319, P2321, P2322 are not set.
The catalyst temperature is less than 350°C (662°F).
The engine coolant temperature is between -15 - 56°C (5 - 132.8°F).
The barometric pressure is greater than 76 kPa.
The engine speed is between 450 - 2200 RPM.
The accelerator pedal position is less than 110%.
The engine is running for less than 30 s and a cold start has been detected.
The DTC runs once per cold start.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
This DTC will set if the ECM detects variations in crankshaft rotation speed caused by the lack of adequate fuel delivery during dual-pulse mode.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P050D is a Type B DTC.
The ECM disables dual pulse mode and energizes the fuel injector as it would for a warm engine.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P050D is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids
This DTC may be set with a misfire DTC, however the existence of this DTC is a higher priority and indicates the condition to diagnose is related to fuel and/or injectors, not the ignition/spark system.
A restricted fuel injector may cause this DTC to set.
High resistance in the circuits of the injectors could set this DTC without setting an injector DTC. Test the injector circuits of the affected cylinders for a high resistance if you suspect a condition.
A drop in system voltage during cold start may set this DTC.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification requires cold start. Do not start vehicle prior to connecting scan tool and preparing to evaluate the condition during engine crank.
1. Engine running.
2. Verify that the scan tool Cylinder 1-4 Current Misfire Counters are not incrementing during first 500 engine cycles.
If incrementing
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If not incrementing
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Verify that the fuel pressure is not too low or too high. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
If a condition is found
Repair or replace components as necessary
If a condition is not found
2. Verify that the fuel is not contaminated. Refer to Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis.
If the fuel is contaminated
Clean the fuel system. Refer to Fuel System Cleaning .
If the fuel is not contaminated
3. Replace the appropriate fuel injectors as indicated by high misfire counts.
Repair Instructions
NOTE: Repair Verification requires cold start.
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. Refer to Fuel Injector Replacement
DTC P057B-P057E: BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P057B
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Performance
DTC P057C
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P057D
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P057E
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Circuit Erratic
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Signal |
P057C |
P057C |
P057D |
P057B, P057E |
5 V Reference |
P057C P0651 |
P057C |
P0651 |
- |
Low Reference |
- |
P057D |
P057D |
- |
Typical Scan Tool Data
Brake Pedal Position Sensor
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: Vehicle in Service Mode Normal Range: 0.25 - 4.75 V |
|||
5 V Reference |
0 V |
0 V |
- |
Signal |
0 V |
0 V |
5 V |
Low Reference |
- |
5 V |
- |
Circuit/System Description
The brake pedal position (BPP) sensor is part of the engine brake pedal override feature. The engine control module (ECM) continuously monitors the vehicle speed and the position of the brake pedal. These two main inputs, along with other ECM inputs are used to determine if the vehicle is decelerating at the proper speed and rate with the brake pedal applied. When the engine brake pedal override system is active, the ECM reduces engine torque to assist in reducing vehicle speed.
The BPP sensor is a six wire sensor, and is part of a dual brake position sensor. One BPP Sensor is used for the stop lamps and the other BPP Sensor is used for the engine brake pedal override feature. The BPP Sensor for engine brake pedal override communicates with the ECM. The ECM supplies a 5 V reference circuit, low reference circuit, and signal circuit to the BPP sensor. The BPP sensor sends a voltage signal to the ECM on the signal circuit. The voltage on the signal circuit will vary from a voltage greater than 0.25 V when the brake
pedal is released to a voltage less than 4.75 V when the brake pedal is fully applied.
For information on the Stop Lamps side of the BPP Sensor, refer to Exterior Lighting Systems Description and Operation .
Conditions for Running the DTC
P057B
DTCs P057C, or P057D are not set.
Ignition voltage is greater than 10 V.
Shift lever has been in Park at least once during key ON.
Shift lever is not in Park.
Vehicle speed is greater than 8 Km/h (5 mph).
Accelerator Pedal Position is less than 5%.
DTC runs once per key cycle when above conditions are met.
P057C, P057D, or P057E
Ignition voltage is greater than 10 V.
DTC runs continuously when above condition is met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P057B
ECM detects the BPP sensor signal is stuck in a range for greater than 1 s.
P057C
ECM detects the BPP sensor voltage is less than 0.25 V greater than 1 s.
P057D
ECM detects the BPP sensor voltage is greater than 4.75 V greater than 1 s.
P057E
ECM detects the BPP sensor value varies greater than a calibrated value.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
P057B, P057C, P057D, and P057E are Type A DTCs.
Brake Pedal Position Sensor parameter defaults to 0%.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
P057B, P057C, P057D, and P057E are Type A DTCs
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Exterior Lights Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
INLINE HARNESS CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: The Brake Pedal Position sensor scan tool data is located in the ECM automatic transmission data list.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0641, P0651, P0697, or P06A3 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Transmission in Park, and service brake pedal released.
4. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Position Sensor parameter in the ECM displays released.
If released is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If released is not displayed
5. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Position Sensor parameter changes as the brake pedal is applied and displays applied on a scan tool when the brake pedal is fully applied.
If applied is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If applied is not displayed
6. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learned Release Position parameter is within 0.1 V of the Brake Pedal Position Sensor parameter when the brake pedal is fully released.
If difference is greater than 0.1 V
Perform the Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learn .
If difference is 0.1 V or less
7. Verify the Brake Pedal Position Sensor parameter transitions smoothly without any spikes or dropouts when slowly applying and releasing the brake pedal.
If parameter does not transition smoothly or has spikes or dropouts
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If parameter transitions smoothly and there are no spikes or dropouts
8. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
9. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
10. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification first.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
NOTE: All terminal references are for the vehicle harness brake pedal position sensor connector.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 6 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 10 Ω
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 5 and ground.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If between 4.8 - 5.2 V
5. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Position Sensor parameter is released.
If released is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle ON.
2. Test for less than 0.25 V between the signal circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If 0.25 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 0.25 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If released is displayed
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 4 and the 5 V reference circuit terminal 5.
7. Verify the scan tool Brake Pedal Position Sensor parameter is applied.
If applied is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, and disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If applied is displayed
8. Replace the B22 Brake Pedal Position Sensor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Replacement
Perform the
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Learn
following the replacement of the ECM or BPP sensor, or any repair that effects the BPP sensor alignment.
Refer to
Control Module References
for Engine Control Module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P0601-P0604, P0606, P062B, P062F, P0630, P16F3, OR P262B: CONTROL MODULE
Diagnostic Instructions
Preform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P0601
Control Module Read Only Memory Performance
DTC P0602
Control Module Not Programmed
DTC P0603
Control Module Long Term Memory Reset
DTC P0604
Control Module Random Access Memory Performance
DTC P0606
Control Module Processor Performance
DTC P062B
Control Module Fuel Injector Control Performance
DTC P062F
Control Module Long Term Memory Performance
DTC P0630
VIN Not Programmed or Mismatched - Engine Control Module (ECM)
DTC P16F3
Control Module Redundant Memory Performance
DTC P262B
Control Module Power Off Timer Performance
Circuit/System Description
This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the engine control module (ECM). This diagnostic also addresses if the ECM is not programmed.
The ECM monitors its ability to read and write to the memory. It also monitors a timing function.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P0601, P0602, P0630
The vehicle is ON.
These DTCs run continuously when the above condition is met.
P0603, P062F
The vehicle is ON.
These DTCs run once per ignition cycle.
P0604
The vehicle is ON for greater than 30 s.
DTC P0604 runs continuously when the above condition is met.
P0606, P062B
The system voltage is greater than 11 V.
DTC P0606 runs continuously when the above condition is met.
P16F3
The engine is running.
DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, or P0108 are not set.
DTC P16F3 runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P262B
Vehicle OFF.
The ECM is not powered down.
DTC P262B runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects an internal failure or incomplete programming for more than 10 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P0606, P0630, and P16F3 are Type A DTCs.
DTCs P062F and P262B are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P0606, P0630, and P16F3 are Type A DTCs.
DTCs P062B, P062F and P262B are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
Low voltage or a momentary loss of power or ground to the ECM may cause a DTC to set. Verify the following:
The battery cables are clean and tight, and the battery is fully charged. Refer to Battery Inspection/Test
The ECM ground circuits do not have an open or high resistance.
The ECM power circuits do not have an open, short to ground, or high resistance.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Component View Reference
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, clear the DTC information with a scan tool.
2. Verify no other DTCs are set.
If any other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for further diagnosis.
If no other DTCs are set
3. Verify DTC P0602 or P0630 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
1. Program the K20 Engine Control Module. Refer to Control Module References .
2. Verify DTC P0602 or P0630 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If none of the DTCs are set
3. All OK.
If none of the DTCs are set
4. Verify DTC P0601, P0603, P0604, P0606, P062B, P062F, P16F3, or P262B is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If none of the DTCs are set
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P0627-P0629: FUEL PUMP ENABLE CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0627
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit
DTC P0628
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0629
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Control |
P0171, P0506, P0628, P12A6 |
P0171, P0506, P0627, P12A6 |
P0629, P12A6 |
P12A6 |
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) provides ignition voltage to the fuel pump driver control module whenever the engine is cranking or running. The ECM enables the fuel pump driver control module as long as the engine is cranking or running, and ignition system reference pulses are received. While this enable voltage is being received, the fuel pump driver control module supplies a varying voltage to the in-tank fuel pump module in order to maintain the desired fuel line pressure.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The engine speed is greater than 0 RPM.
The ignition voltage is greater than or equal to 11 V.
The fuel pump enable circuit is commanded ON.
The DTCs run continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match for 2.5 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P0627, P0628, and P0629 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P0627, P0628, and P0629 are Type B DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0627, P0628, or P0629 is not set.
If a DTC is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If a DTC is not set
3. Verify the parameters listed below do not display Malfunction when commanding the Fuel Pump Enable On and Off with a scan tool.
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage Test Status
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Open Test Status
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit High Voltage Test Status
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If Malfunction is not displayed
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module harness connector.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode for greater than 10 s.
3. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
4. Remove the test lamp.
5. Verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage Test Status parameter is OK when commanding the Fuel Pump Enable On with a scan tool.
If OK is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If OK is displayed
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground.
7. Verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage Test Status parameter is Malfunction when commanding the Fuel Pump Enable On with a scan tool.
If Malfunction is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If Malfunction is displayed
8. Test or replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for Engine Control Module and Fuel Pump Power Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3, OR P06D2: 5 V REFERENCE 1-5 CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P0641
5 V Reference 1 Circuit
DTC P0651
5 V Reference 2 Circuit
DTC P0697
5 V Reference 3 Circuit
DTC P06A3
5 V Reference 4 Circuit
DTC P06D2
5 V Reference 5 Circuit
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) has 5 internal 5 V reference circuits. Each internal reference circuit provides external 5 V reference circuits for more than one sensor. A short to ground or short to voltage on one external 5 V reference circuit can affect all the components connected to the same internal 5 V reference circuit.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The DTCs run continuously when the ignition voltage is greater than 6.4 V.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects a short to ground or voltage on any of the 5 V reference circuits for greater than 0.5 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3, and P06D2 are Type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3, and P06D2 are Type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
The 5 V reference 1 circuit provides 5 V circuits to the sensors listed below:
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant pressure sensor
Exhaust camshaft position sensor
Intake camshaft position sensor
Fuel tank pressure sensor
The 5 V reference 2 circuit provides 5 V circuits to the sensors listed below:
Evaporative emission system leak detection pump assembly
Crankshaft position sensor
The 5 V reference 3 circuit provides 5 V circuits to the sensors listed below:
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 2
The 5 V reference 4 circuit provides 5 V circuits to the sensors listed below:
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
Throttle position sensor 1 and 2
Disconnecting one component at a time from the affected 5 V reference circuit while observing the scan tool 5 V Reference Circuit Status parameter may help locate the fault. The scan tool parameter will change from Malfunction to OK when the source of the fault is disconnected. If all 5 V reference components have been disconnected and a fault is still indicated, the fault may exist in the wiring harness.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Component View Reference
Powertrain Component Views
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify all scan tool 5 V Reference Circuit Status parameters do not display Malfunction.
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If Malfunction is not displayed
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Additional DTCs will set when disconnecting the components.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at all appropriate sensors for the applicable DTC. Refer to Diagnostic Aids.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between one of the 5 V reference circuits and ground.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit for each applicable component and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit for each applicable component and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If between 4.8 - 5.2 V
NOTE: A short to voltage or ground on the signal circuit of certain components may cause this DTC to set.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Verify the appropriate scan tool 5 V Reference 1, 2, 3, or 4 Circuit Status parameter displays OK while connecting each component associated with the 5 V reference circuit one at a time.
If OK is not displayed when a component is connected
Test the signal circuit of that component for a short to ground or voltage. If the circuit tests normal, replace the component.
If OK is displayed after all components have been connected
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Accelerator Pedal Replacement
Refer to
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Intake
Refer to
Camshaft Position Sensor Replacement - Exhaust
Refer to
Crankshaft Position Sensor Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
Refer to
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Replacement
Refer to
Throttle Body Assembly Replacement
Refer to
Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for engine control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P0650, P263A, OR P263B: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0650
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Control Circuit
DTC P263A
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Control Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P263B
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Control Circuit High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Ignition Voltage |
P0650 |
P0650 |
- |
- |
Control |
P0650, P263A* |
P0650, P263A |
P263B |
- |
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
* The MIL remains ON |
Circuit/System Description
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates to inform the driver that an emission system fault has occurred and the powertrain control system requires service. Ignition voltage is supplied directly to the MIL. The engine control module (ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit when the emission system fault occurs. Under normal operating conditions, the MIL should be ON only when the vehicle is ON and the engine is OFF.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ignition is ON or the engine is running.
The ignition voltage is greater than 11 V.
The DTCs run continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
DTC P0650 or DTC P263A
The ECM detects low voltage during the MIL control circuit driver OFF state. This indicates either a shorted to ground or an open MIL control circuit.
DTC P263B
The ECM detects high voltage on the MIL control circuit during the driver ON state. This indicates a shorted to voltage MIL control circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P0650, P263A, and P263B are type B DTCs, with no MIL request
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P0650, P263A, and P263B are type B DTCs, with no MIL request.
Diagnostic Aids
If the ECM detects low voltage on the MIL control circuit during the control circuit driver OFF state, DTCs P0650 and DTC P263A may set simultaneously.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Instrument Cluster Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Engine Running.
2. Verify that the malfunction indicator lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) On and Off with a scan tool.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the malfunction indicator lamp turns ON and OFF
3. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 16 and B+ when commanding the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) On and Off with a scan tool.
If the test lamp is always ON
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V.
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 Ω between the control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
3. Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Instrument Cluster Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for engine control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P0685-P0690, P1682, P16A7, P16AF, OR P16B3: ENGINE CONTROLS IGNITION RELAY/IGNITION 1 SWITCH CIRCUIT 2
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure:
Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:
Strategy Based Diagnosis
An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0685
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Control Circuit
DTC P0686
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Control Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0687
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Control Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0689
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0690
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Circuit High Voltage
DTC P1682
Ignition 1 Switch Circuit 2
DTC P16A7
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Circuit 2
DTC P16AF
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Circuit 2 Low Voltage
DTC P16B3
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Circuit 2 High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
B+ - Relay Coil |
P0689, P1682 |
P0685, P0689, P1682, P16A7, P16AF |
- |
- |
B+ - Relay Switch |
P0689, P1682 |
P0685, P0689, P1682, P16A7, P16AF |
- |
- |
Control - Component |
P0689, P1682 |
P0689, P1682, P16A7, P16AF |
P0690, P16B3 |
- |
Control - Relay Coil |
P0686, P0690 |
P0685, P0689, P1682, P16A7, P16AF |
P0685, P0687, P0689, P1682* |
- |
*Internal control module or component damage may occur if the circuit shorts to B+. |
Circuit/System Description
Circuit |
Description |
B+ - Relay Coil |
Supplied directly from the battery. |
B+ - Relay Switch |
Supplied directly from the battery. |
Control - Component |
The output circuit is switched to 12 V to activate the component. |
Control - Relay Coil |
The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the component. |
Components
Component |
Description |
Component |
Description |
KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay |
The powertrain relay is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM) depending upon input from the ignition switch. Battery positive voltage is supplied to the relay coil and switch. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the ECM will provide ground on the control circuit of the powertrain relay using a low side driver. This will allow voltage through the relay switch contacts to the components. The ECM monitors the voltage level on the control circuit of the powertrain relay. |
K20 Engine Control Module |
The control module controls a series of actuators to ensure optimal engine performance. The control module does this by reading values from a variety of sensors, interprets the data and adjusts the engine actuators accordingly. |
4 ignition voltage circuits supply the ECM. The 4 circuits are supplied by 2 relay(s):
KR73 Ignition Main Relay
KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
The ECM monitors and compares the voltages supplied by the relay(s).
Conditions for Running the DTC
P0685, P0686, P0687
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 11 V
DTCs run continuously when the above condition is met.
P0689, P16AF
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 11 V
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Command = On
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P0690, P16B3
DTC P0685 = Not set
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Command = Off - For greater than 2 s
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P1682, P16A7
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Command = On
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 5.5 V
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P0685, P0686, P0687
The commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match for greater than 2 s.
P0689
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Circuit = Less than 5 V - For greater than 5 s
P0690
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Circuit = Greater than 4 V - For greater than 5 s
P1682, P16A7
The following parameters are not within 3 V of each other:
Ignition 1 Signal
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Signal
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback 2 Signal
P16AF
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback 2 Signal = Less than 5 V - For greater than 5 s
P16B3
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback 2 Signal = Greater than 4 V - For greater than 5 s
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P0685, P0686, P0687, P0689, P0690, P16AF, P16B3 are Type C DTCs.
DTCs P1682, P16A7 are Type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P0685, P0686, P0687, P0689, P0690, P16AF, P16B3 are Type C DTCs.
DTCs P1682, P16A7 are Type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
If the condition is intermittent, wiggle the related wiring harnesses and connectors, with the ignition/vehicle on or engine running, while monitoring the scan tool circuit status parameters for the component. The parameters will display if there is a condition with the circuit or a connection.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Power Distribution Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Electrical Center Identification Views
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical Center)
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
2. Verify no other DTCs are set.
If other DTCs are set
Refer to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If no other DTCs are set
3. Ignition/Vehicle - Cycle On and Off
Verify the component produces a clicking sound: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
If the component does not produce a sound
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
If the component produces a sound
4. Verify the following parameters are within 3 V of each other:
Ignition 1 Signal
Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Signal
If not within 3 V of each other
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
If within 3 V of each other
5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
If the DTC sets
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Remove the component: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
3. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points:
B+ circuit terminal 30 & Ground
B+ circuit terminal 85 & Ground
If the test lamp does not turn On
Replace the component: X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
If the test lamp turns On
4. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
5. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 & B+ circuit
6. Perform the scan tool control function: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay - On and Off Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
If the test lamp is always Off
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket & Terminal 67 @ Control module harness
If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V
5. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket & Terminal 67 @ Control module harness
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If the test lamp is always On
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket & Ground
If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If the test lamp turns On and Off
7. Verify the fuse is not open:
F4UA Fuse
F17UA Fuse
If the fuse is open
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Output terminal @ Fuse & Ground
If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If the fuse is not open
8. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
9. Verify a test lamp does not turn On between the test points: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay Terminal 87 & Ground
If the test lamp turns On
10. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @ K20 Engine Control Module
11. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:
Control circuit terminal 73 @ Control module harness & Ground
Control circuit terminal 16 @ Control module harness & Ground
If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If the test lamp does not turn On
12. Vehicle Off.
13. Connect a 30 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control circuit terminal 87 & B+ circuit terminal 30
14. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
15. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Controls Ignition Relay Feedback Signal = Within 1 V of the battery voltage
If not within 1 V of the battery voltage
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:
Control circuit terminal 87 @ Relay Socket & Control circuit terminal 73 @ Control module harness
Control circuit terminal 87 @ Relay Socket & Control circuit terminal 16 @ Control module
harness
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If within 1 V of the battery voltage
16. Test or replace the component: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
Component Testing
Relay Test
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Remove the component: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
3. Test for 70 to 110 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 85 & 86
If not between 70 and 110 ohms
Replace the component: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
If between 70 and 110 ohms
4. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:
Component terminal 30 & 85
Component terminal 30 & 86
Component terminal 30 & 87
Component terminal 85 & 87
If less than infinite resistance
Replace the component: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
If infinite resistance
5. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 86 & B+ Connect a jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 85 & Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 30 & 87
If 2 ohms or greater
Replace the component: KR75 Engine Controls Ignition Relay
If less than 2 ohms
7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
Refer to
Fuse Block Replacement
Refer to
Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) Relay Replacement (Within an Electrical
Center)
For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to:
Control Module References
DTC P06E4: CONTROL MODULE WAKE-UP CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE (ECM)
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P06E4
Control Module Wake-Up Circuit Performance
Circuit/System Description
This DTC can set in either the engine control module (ECM) or the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2. These modules share the same circuit for this DTC however the criteria and reasons for setting are different. Whenever the propulsion system goes active, the diagnostic reads its internal timer and evaluates the results from the wake-up events that could have occurred.
For each wake-up event the status can be:
Pass - the wake-up event occurred within a window 14 V Power Module
Indeterminate - the ECM was already awake at the time the wake-up event could have occurred
Fail - the wake-up event occurred outside a window or did not occur at all
If any of the wake-up events indicate a failure then the DTC fails.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC's P0502, P0503, P0722, P0723, P262B, U182D, U0073, U0074 or P2537 is not set.
Drive distance of greater than 0.1 mi.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Whenever the propulsion system goes active, the ECM diagnostic reads its internal timer and evaluates the results from the wake-up events that could have occurred. The DTC fails if any of the wake-up events did not occur within a specified window:
The 5.0 h wake-up event did not occur from 4.3 to 5.8 h.
The 7.0 h wake-up event did not occur from 6.0 to 8.1 h.
The 9.5 h wake-up event did not occur from 8.2 to 11.0 h.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P06E4 is a type B DTC.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P06E4 is a type B DTC. Reference Information
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P06E4, P24EF, P24F0, or P24F1 is set in the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If none of the DTCs are set
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module and perform repair verification.
Repair Verification
1. Drive the vehicle for greater than 0.1 mi.
2. Park the vehicle and let it set for a minimum of 6 h. This allows the ECM to request a K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 wake-up to occur.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify DTC P06E4 did not set.
If DTC is set
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module and repeat steps 1 - 4.
If no DTC's are set
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P1101: INTAKE AIR FLOW SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure:
Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:
Strategy Based Diagnosis
An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
DTC P1101
Intake Air Flow System Performance
Circuit/System Description
This system consists of the following components:
Component |
Description |
B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor |
The assembly has several functions:
126.8 kohms @ -60°C (-76°F)
|
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor |
The sensor is a 3-wire capacitive pressure transducer. Electronics in the sensor convert pressure into an analog voltage signal. |
K20 Engine Control Module |
The control module controls a series of actuators to ensure optimal engine performance. The control module does this by reading values from a variety of sensors, interprets the data and adjusts the engine actuators accordingly. |
Q38 Throttle Body |
The throttle body contains a contactless inductive position sensor. A fixed transmitter coil excites a movable rotor, which in turn induces a current in a fixed receiver coil. The current varies with the angle of the rotor. Electronics inside the sensor convert the current into digital data which is transmitted via a |
Component |
Description |
|
serial data circuit to the ECM. |
The ECM compares the measured mass air flow with the calculated air flow based on throttle position and the calculated air flow based on manifold absolute pressure.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0128, P0335, P0336 = Not set
Engine Speed = 0 to 5,400 RPM
Engine Coolant Temperature = -7 to +129°C (+19 to +264°F)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor = -20 to +125°C (-4 to +257°F)
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The difference between the air flow measured by the mass air flow sensor and a calculated value based on the throttle position exceeds the allowed range.
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P1101 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P1101 is a Type B DTC. Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to: DTC P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3, or P06D2
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify the scan tool parameter: Throttle Body Idle Air Flow Compensation = Less than 90%
If 90% or greater
Refer to: Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning
If less than 90%
4. Perform a component sweep test: Throttle Sweep
Verify the scan tool parameter: Throttle Position Sensors 1 and 2 = Agree
If not the specified state
Refer to: DTC P0121-P0123, P0222, P0223, P16A0-P16A2, or P2135
If the specified state
5. Determine the current vehicle testing altitude.
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: MAP Sensor = Altitude Versus Barometric Pressure
If not in the specified range
Refer to: DTC P0106
If in the specified range
7. Verify the following conditions do not exist:
Vacuum leak at the component:
Intake Manifold
B74 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
Q38 Throttle Body
An object is blocking the component:
Q38 Throttle Body
Restrictions in the intake system.
Loose clamps, cracks, or other damages to the intake system.
Water intrusion at the mass air flow sensor.
Contamination of the measuring element of the mass air flow sensor.
Missing, restricted or leaking exhaust components. - Refer to:
Symptoms - Engine Exhaust
An engine mechanical condition. - Refer to:
Symptoms - Engine Mechanical
If a condition is found
Repair or replace component as appropriate.
If no condition is found
8. Engine idling.
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: MAP Sensor = 26 and 52 kPa (3.8 and 7.5 PSI) and changes - The value should change with accelerator pedal input.
If not between 26 and 52 kPa (3.8 and 7.5 PSI) or does not change
Refer to: DTC P0106
If between 26 and 52 kPa (3.8 and 7.5 PSI) and changes
10. Engine = At normal operating temperature.
11. Engine Speed = 1,375 to 1,425 RPM
12. Verify the scan tool parameter: MAF Sensor = 1,800 and 2,400 Hz
If not between 1,800 and 2,400 Hz
Refer to: DTC P0101
If between 1,800 and 2,400 Hz
13. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
14. Verify that no DTCs are set.
If any DTC is set
Refer to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If no DTC is set
15. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References DTC P111E: ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR NOT PLAUSIBLE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P111E
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Not Plausible
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
High Resistance |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Signal |
P0117 |
P0118 |
P0118 |
P0118 |
P0128, P111E |
Low Reference |
- |
P0118 |
P0118 |
- |
P0128 |
Typical Scan Tool Data
ECT Sensor Temperature
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: Engine Running Parameter Normal Range: -39 to +120°C (-38 to +248°F) |
|||
ECT Sensor |
150°C (302°F) |
-40°C (-40°F) |
-40°C (-40°F) |
Low Reference |
- |
-40°C (-40°F) |
-40°C (-40°F) |
Circuit/System Description
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor is a variable resistor that measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The engine control module (ECM) supplies 5V to the ECT sensor signal circuit and a ground for the low reference circuit.
The purpose of this diagnostic is to determine if the input from the ECT sensor is skewed warmer than normal. The internal clock of the ECM will record the amount of time the engine is OFF. If the required engine OFF time is met at start-up, the ECM will compare the temperature difference between the actual measured ECT and a calibrated ECT model. The information for this model is derived from the previous drive cycle and includes the accumulated mass air flow (MAF), the engine run time, the ambient air temperature and the ECT at the end of the drive cycle.
If the ECM detects that the temperature difference between the measured and modeled ECT is not within an acceptable operating range of each other, then the ECM will continue to run this diagnostic to determine if a block heater was active during the engine OFF time.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0117, P0118, P0128, P0502, P0503, P0601, P1621, or P2610 are
not set.
The vehicle has had a minimum ignition OFF time of 8 hours.
The engine is running.
The start-up modeled ECT is colder than 50°C (+122°F).
The previous accumulated MAF is greater than 6,000 grams.
The previous engine run time is greater than 600 seconds.
OR
The vehicle has had a minimum ignition OFF time of 8 hours.
The engine is running.
The previous ECT at engine shutdown is warmer than 75°C (+167°F).
The previous accumulated MAF is greater than 6,000 grams.
The previous engine run time is greater than 600 seconds.
This DTC runs once per ignition cycle within the enabling conditions.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P111E
The ECM detects a temperature difference at initial power-up that indicates that the actual measured ECT is 10°C (18°F) greater than the modeled ECT, and an active block heater has not been detected.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P111E is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC DTC P111E is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids
Engine coolant that is leaking through the sensor will create a high resistance short to ground. This condition results in less voltage on the ECT sensor signal circuit, which is interpreted by the ECM as a warmer ECT.
The ECM memory which includes the ignition OFF timer is maintained by battery power. If the ECM or the battery are disconnected for less than 15 seconds the proper operation of the ECM memory and the timer can be disrupted. Always disconnect these components for greater than 30 seconds.
A failed start due to low battery voltage may cause P111E to set when ambient temperature is below
-7°C (19°F) and a block heater has been use. If this occurs clear the DTC and operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC, if P111E sets refer to Circuit/System Verification.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify the cooling system is filled to the correct coolant level. Refer to Cooling System Leak Testing , and Cooling System Draining and Filling
If the coolant level is not filled to the correct level
Repair as necessary.
If the coolant level is correct
2. Verify that DTC P00B3, P00B4, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0117, P0118, P0128, P0601, P112F,
P1621, or P2610 is not set.
If DTC P00B3, P00B4, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0117, P0118, P0128, P0601, P112F,
P1621, or P2610 is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If DTC P00B3, P00B4, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0117, P0118, P0128, P0601, P112F,
P1621, or P2610 is not set
3. Vehicle OFF for a minimum of 8 hours.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode
5. Verify with a scan tool that IAT Sensor 1, Radiator Coolant Temperature Sensor, Ambient Temperature Sensor and the ECT Sensor are within 15°C (59°F) of each other.
If the Radiator Coolant Temperature Sensor parameter is not within 15°C (59°F) of the ECT Sensor and IAT Sensor 1 or ambient temperature.
Perform the diagnostic for DTC P00B3 or P00B4, Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If the IAT Sensor 1 parameter is not within 15°C (59°F) of the ECT Sensor and Radiator Coolant Temperature Sensor or ambient temperature.
Perform the diagnostic for DTC P0112, P0113, or P0114, Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If the ECT Sensor parameter is not within 15°C (59°F) of the IAT Sensor 1 and Radiator Coolant Temperature Sensor or ambient temperature.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If all the parameters are within 15°C (59°F) of each other and ambient temperature.
6. Vehicle OFF.
7. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
8. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
9. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor harness connector at the sensor. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 5 Ω
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the scan tool ECT Sensor parameter is colder than -39°C (-38°F).
If warmer than -39°C (-38°F)
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module
If colder than -39°C (-38°F)
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and the low reference circuit terminal 2.
6. Verify the scan tool ECT sensor parameter is warmer than 149°C (300°F).
If warmer than 149°C (300°F)
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V
7. Test or replace the B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor.
2. Test the ECT sensor by varying the sensor temperature while measuring the sensor resistance. Compare the readings with the Temperature Versus Resistance (Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor) table. The resistance values should be in range of the table values.
If not within the specified range
Replace the B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor.
If within the specified range
3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the sensor housing.
If less than infinite resistance
Replace the B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor.
If infinite resistance
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Replacement - Water Outlet
Refer to
Control Module References
for K20 engine control module (ECM) replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P1255: FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE DRIVER HIGH TEMPERATURE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P1255
Fuel Pump Control Module Driver High Temperature
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump driver control module when the ECM detects that the ignition is on. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump driver control module remains active
for 2 s, unless the engine is in crank or run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump driver control module supplies a varying voltage to the fuel tank fuel pump module in order to maintain the desired fuel pressure.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ignition voltage is between 9 - 32 V.
The engine is cranking or running.
The fuel pump enable circuit is commanded ON.
The DTC runs continuously when the conditions above are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The fuel pump driver control module detects a driver temperature greater than or equal to 320°F (160°C) for less than 0.2 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P1255 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P1255 is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids
Using the Failure Records data may help locate an intermittent condition. If you cannot duplicate the DTC, the information in the Failure Records can help determine how many miles since the DTC set. The Fail Counter and Pass Counter can help determine how many ignition cycles that the diagnostic test reported a pass and/or a fail.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0231, P0232, or P023F is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify that the area where the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module is located is free of debris, clutter, or any insulating material that would cause the fuel pump driver control module to overheat.
If any debris, clutter, or other material is found
1. Clear the area where the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module is located.
2. Clear the DTC and test drive the vehicle.
3. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets, replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
If the DTC is not set
4. All OK.
If no debris, clutter, or other material is found
4. Clear the DTC and test drive the vehicle.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
If the DTC does not set.
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. Refer to Fuel Pump Power Control Module Replacement
DTC P127C, P128A-P128D, P128F, P16E4, OR P16E5: FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR 2-1/FUEL RAIL PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE SENSOR/SENSOR COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT 3 VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P127C
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P128A
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 1 Internal Performance
DTC P128B
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor 2 Internal Performance
DTC P128C
Fuel Rail Pressure-Temperature Sensor Temperature 1 Message Incorrect
DTC P128D
Fuel Rail Pressure-Temperature Sensor Temperature 2 Message Incorrect
DTC P128F
Fuel Rail Pressure-Temperature Sensor Pressure Message Incorrect
DTC P16E4
Sensor Communication Circuit 3 Low Voltage
DTC P16E5
Sensor Communication Circuit 3 High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
5 V Reference |
P0452, P06D2, P16E5 |
P16E4 |
P06D2, P128A, P128B |
P0191 |
Signal |
P16E4 |
P128C, P128D, P16E5 |
P16E5 |
P0191 |
Low Reference |
- |
P128C, P128D, P16E5 |
- |
P0191 |
Typical Scan Tool Data
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: The engine is operating with the throttle closed. All accessories OFF. Parameter Normal Range: 2.9-3.2 MPa |
|||
5 V Reference |
655.4 MPa |
655.4 MPa |
655.4 MPa |
Signal |
655.4 MPa |
655.4 MPa |
655.4 MPa |
Low Reference |
- |
655.4 MPa |
- |
Circuit/System Description
The fuel pressure/temperature sensor transmits fuel pressure and temperature information by serial data using the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J2716 Single Edge Nibble Transmission (SENT) protocol. The fuel pressure/temperature sensor internal microprocessor allows 4 separate sensor outputs from one 3 wire sensor.
The engine control module (ECM) supplies the fuel pressure/temperature sensor with a 5 V reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and an asynchronous signal/serial data circuit. The asynchronous signal means communication is only going from the fuel pressure/temperature sensor to the ECM. The ECM decodes the serial data signal into separate voltages.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P127C, P16E4 or P16E5
Ignition is ON.
No DTC clear code.
The DTCs run continuously when the above conditions are met.
P128A or P128B
DTC P128F, P16E4 or P16E5 is not set.
Ignition is ON.
The DTCs run continuously when the above conditions are met.
P128C, P128D, or P128F
DTC P16E4 or P16E5 is not set.
Ignition is ON.
The DTCs run continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P127C
The engine control module detects the fuel pressure sensor 2 SENT digital read value is less than or equal to 76 for greater than 30 s with the engine running or greater than 10 s with the engine cranking.
P128A
The engine control module detects the fuel pressure sensor 1 SENT digital read value is greater than or equal to 4,089 for greater than 3 s.
P128B
The engine control module detects the fuel pressure sensor 2 SENT digital read value is greater than or equal to 4,089 for greater than 3 s.
P128C
The engine control module detects communication errors on the fuel pressure sensor temperature 1 SENT signal circuit for greater than 1 s.
P128D
The engine control module detects communication errors on the fuel pressure sensor temperature 2 SENT signal circuit for greater than 1 s.
P128F
The engine control module detects fuel pressure sensor SENT signal discrepancies for greater than 3 s.
P16E4
The engine control module detects the fuel pressure sensor SENT signal shorted low for greater than 3 s.
P16E5
The engine control module detects the fuel pressure sensor SENT signal shorted high for greater than 3 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P127C, P128A, P128B, P128F, P16E4, and P16E5 are Type A DTCs.
DTCs P128C and P128D are Type B DTCs.
A message center or an indicator displays Propulsion Power is Reduced and Service Stabilitrak.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P127C, P128A, P128B, P128F, P16E4, and P16E5 are Type A DTCs.
DTCs P128C and P128D are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
A high resistance condition on the fuel pressure/temperature sensor circuits could cause a DTC to set.
Inspect for a contaminated fuel system.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC P0641, P0651, P0697, or P06A3 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for further diagnosis.
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify that DTC P0182, P0183, P0187, P0188, P111F, P126E, P126F, P127C, P128A, P128B, P128C,
P128D, P128F, P16E4, or P16E5 are not set.
If DTC P128A, P128B, P128C, P128D, or P128F are the only DTCs set
Replace the B310 Fuel Pressure/Temperature Sensor.
If DTC P0183, P0184, P0187, P0188, P111F, P126E, P126F, P127C, P16E4, or P16E5 is set
with any of the DTCs
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If none of the DTCs are set
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Disconnecting the fuel pressure/temperature sensor harness connector causes additional DTCs to set.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at B310 Fuel Pressure/Temperature Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 5 Ω
3. Ignition/Vehicle ON.
4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition/vehicle ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If between 4.8 - 5.2 V
5. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition/vehicle ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If between 4.8 - 5.2 V
6. Replace the B310 Fuel Pressure/Temperature Sensor.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Fuel Injection Fuel Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor Replacement
for B310 Fuel Pressure/Temperature Sensor
Refer to
Control Module References
for K20 Engine Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P129E OR P12A8: FUEL PUMP DRIVER CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT/FUEL PUMP CONTROL SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for a overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P129E
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module Signal Message Counter Incorrect
DTC P12A8
Fuel Pump Control Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
The fuel pump power control module is in constant communication with the engine control module (ECM) regarding the operating state of the fuel pump power control system. Serial data messages are sent in a continuously repeating series of rolling counts with associated password protect samples. Each count/sample is assigned a value. When the ECM determines that too many of the counts/samples contain an error value, the ECM sets DTC P129E or P12A8.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ignition voltage is greater than 7 V.
The DTC runs continuously when the above condition is met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects an error value for over 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P129E and P12A8 are Type A DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P129E and P12A8 are Type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent fault in the CAN circuits will cause the ECM to set DTC P129E or P12A8.
Reference Information
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE:
DTC P129E and P12A8 are informational DTCs.
Diagnose all other engine control module DTCs prior to DTC P129E or P12A8.
1. Verify that no other DTCs are set except for DTC P129E or P12A8.
If any other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If only DTC P129E or P12A8 is set
2. Replace the K111 Fuel Pump Power Control Module.
3. Verify the DTC does not set while operating the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC.
If DTC sets
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If DTC does not set
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Control Module References
for K111 Fuel Pump Power Control Module and K20 Engine Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P129B OR P129C: FUEL PUMP DRIVER CONTROL MODULE SYSTEM VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P129B
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module System Voltage Low Voltage
DTC P129C
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module System Voltage High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
B+ |
P018B, P0506, P129B, P2635, U18A2 |
P018B, P0506, P129B, P2635, U18A2 |
P129C |
Circuit/System Description
The fuel pump driver control module monitors the battery positive voltage circuit to verify the voltage is between the normal operating range. The DTC can set for a circuit or system voltage out of range.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P129B
The engine is running.
The ignition voltage is between 9 - 32 V.
The fuel pump enable circuit is commanded ON.
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P129C
The engine is not running.
The ignition voltage is between 9 - 32 V.
The fuel pump enable circuit is commanded ON.
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P129B
The fuel pump driver control module detects the battery positive voltage is less than 7 V for 1 s.
P129C
The fuel pump driver control module detects the battery positive voltage is greater than 18 V for 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P129B and P129C are Type C DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P129B and P129C are Type C DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Electrical Center Identification Views
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for 12.4 - 12.8 V at the battery terminals and record the reading. The battery voltage should stabilize after a few minutes of turning the Vehicle OFF.
If not between 12.4 V - 12.8 V
Refer to Battery Inspection/Test .
If between 12.4 V - 12.8 V
3. Engine Running, accessories OFF.
4. Test for 13.4 - 15 V at the battery terminals and record the reading.
If not between 13.4 - 15 V
Refer to Charging System Test .
If between 13.4 - 15 V
5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
6. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
7. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 9 and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
If less than 5 Ω
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
If the test lamp illuminates
4. Replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for Fuel Pump Power Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P129D: FUEL PUMP DRIVER CONTROL MODULE IGNITION ON/START SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P129D
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module Ignition On/Start Switch Circuit Low Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Ignition |
P129D |
P129D |
- |
- |
Circuit/System Description
The fuel pump driver control module monitors the ignition voltage circuit in order to determine if the voltage is within the normal operating range.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The DTC runs continuously when the modules are awake.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The fuel pump driver control module Power Mode does not agree with the engine control module (ECM) Power Mode for 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P129D is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P129D is a Type B DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0562 is not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to DTC B1325, B1330, B1517, C0800, C0899, C0900, C12E1, C12E2, P0561-P0563, P1A0C, P1A0D, or P1EFC .
If the DTC does not set
3. Verify DTC P129D is not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify DTC P129D is not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed first or misdiagnosis may result.
1. Vehicle OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 6 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ignition circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, and disconnect all components on the circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Replace the fuse, Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the fuse is good after connecting each of the components one at a time.
If the fuse opens, replace the component that opens the fuse when connected.
If the fuse is good, all OK.
If the test lamp illuminates
4. Replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for Fuel Pump Power Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P12A6: FUEL PUMP DRIVER CONTROL MODULE ENABLE CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P12A6
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module Enable Circuit Performance
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Fuel Pump Enable |
P0171, P0506, P0628, P12A6 |
P0171, P0506, P12A6 |
- |
P12A6 |
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) provides ignition voltage to the fuel pump driver control module whenever the engine is cranking or running. The control module enables the fuel pump driver control module as long as the engine is cranking or running, and ignition system reference pulses are received. While this enable voltage is being received, the fuel pump driver control module supplies a varying voltage to the in-tank fuel pump module in order to maintain the desired fuel line pressure.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ignition voltage is greater than or equal to 9 V.
The DTC runs continuously when the above condition is met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM state of the fuel pump enable circuit does not match the state of the fuel pump enable circuit sensed by the fuel pump driver control module for 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P12A6 is a Type A DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P12A6 is a Type A DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P12A6 is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC is not set
3. Verify the parameters listed below do not display Malfunction when commanding the Fuel Pump Enable On and Off with a scan tool.
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage Test Status
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Open Test Status
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit High Voltage Test Status
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If Malfunction is not displayed
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode for greater than 10 s.
3. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
4. Remove the test lamp.
5. Verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage Test Status parameter is OK when commanding the Fuel Pump Enable On with a scan tool.
If OK is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If OK is displayed
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground.
7. Verify the scan tool Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage Test Status parameter is Malfunction when commanding the Fuel Pump Enable On with a scan tool.
If Malfunction is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If Malfunction is displayed
8. Replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for ECM and Fuel Pump Power Control Module replacement, setup, and
programming
DTC P135A: IGNITION COIL SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BANK 1
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P135A
Ignition Coil Supply Voltage Circuit Bank 1
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
|
P0201, P0202, |
P0201, P0202, |
|
|
|
P0203, P0204, |
P0203, P0204, |
|
|
Ignition Voltage |
P0300, P0351, |
P0300, P0351, |
- |
- |
|
P0352, P0353, |
P0352, P0353, |
|
|
|
P0354, P135A |
P0354, P135A |
|
|
Circuit/System Description
The ignition system uses an individual ignition coil for each cylinder. The engine control module (ECM) monitors the ignition voltage from the fuse to the individual coils.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Delay starting at ignition On for 5 engine revolutions.
Ignition Run/Crank relay voltage is greater than 5 V
PT relay voltage is greater than 11 V
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects less than 2.5 V on the ignition coil supply voltage circuit.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P135A is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P135A is a Type B DTC. Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electronic Ignition System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool Ignition Coil Supply Voltage parameter displays ON.
If ON is not displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If ON is displayed
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 67 and ground, vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 51 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ignition circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
NOTE: The ignition circuit may supply voltage to other components. Make sure to test all circuits and components for a short to ground that share the ignition circuit.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, and disconnect all components on the circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Replace the fuse, vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify the fuse is good after connecting each of the components one at a time.
If the fuse opens, replace the component that opens the fuse when connected.
If the fuse is good, all OK.
If the test lamp illuminates
4. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Ignition Coil Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for engine control module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P1400: COLD START EMISSION REDUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P1400
Cold Start Emission Reduction Control System
Circuit/System Description
The catalyst must be warmed to efficiently reduce the emissions. The cold start strategy is to reduce the amount
of time it takes to warm the catalyst. During a cold start, the engine spark timing is altered to allow the catalyst to warm quickly. This diagnostic monitors the following to build an exhaust energy model:
Spark advance
Engine airflow
Engine coolant temperature
Engine run time
The actual model is then compared to the expected exhaust energy model.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0222, P0223, P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0335, P0336, P0351, P0352, P0353, P0354, P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3, P2122, P2123, P2127,
P2128, P2135, and P2138 are not set.
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is between -12 to +56°C (10 - 132°F).
The calculated 3-way catalyst temperature is colder than 500°C (932°F).
The barometric (BARO) pressure is greater than 75 kPa.
The engine control module (ECM) will exit the diagnostic if the calculated 3-way catalyst temperature is greater than 1,000°C (1832°F) when the engine run time is greater than 17 s.
Vehicle speed is less than 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
The ECM will exit the diagnostic if the engine run time is greater than a calibrated value.
This DTC runs within the first 15 s of start-up. This diagnostic runs once per trip when a cold start has been determined.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The actual exhaust energy model does not match the expected exhaust energy model.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P1400 is a Type A DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P1400 is a Type A DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle OFF, allow the engine to cool to be within the temperatures listed in the Conditions for Running the DTC.
2. Engine running.
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC to verify the DTC does not set. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Verify that none of the conditions listed below exists with the air intake system:
Damage, restriction, or modification
Dirty or deteriorating air filter element
Crankcase ventilation system for correct operation
Water intrusion
Vacuum leak and other unmetered air downstream of the mass air flow (MAF) sensor
Intake manifold leak
If any of the above conditions exist
Repair as necessary.
If none of the conditions exist
5. Verify that none of the conditions listed below exists with the exhaust system:
Exhaust leak
Damaged, restricted, or modified exhaust system - Refer to
Symptoms - Engine Exhaust
.
If any of the conditions exist
Repair as necessary.
If none of the conditions exist
If all of the above conditions test normal, inspect for an engine mechanical condition that could alter the air flow into the combustion chamber. Refer to Symptoms - Engine Mechanical .
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
DTC P145C OR P145D: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP STUCK OFF/ON
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P145C
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Stuck Off
DTC P145D
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Stuck On
Circuit/System Description
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system uses a EVAP leak detection pump to test for system leaks. The EVAP leak detection pump assembly consists of the following components:
EVAP leak detection pump with reference orifice
EVAP leak detection pump switching valve
EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor
The EVAP leak detection vacuum pump stuck off test is performed by comparing an initial stabilized EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor, absolute, reading to a second stabilized reading for a short period of time.
The EVAP leak detection vacuum pump stuck on test is performed after the switching valve transitions from vent to not venting, pump, position. If after the second EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor reading, a difference between the two pressure readings indicates the EVAP leak detection vacuum pump is stuck on.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P145C and P145D
DTCs P043E, P043F, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0128, P0449, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P06E4, P0722, P0723, P111E, P1462, P145C, P145D, P145E, P145F, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2227, P2228, P2229, P2230, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2421, P2422, P2450, P24BA, P24BB, P24B9, P2537, P262B,
U0073, U0074, U0140 and U182D is not set.
The propulsion system is not active.
The EVAP purge valve is closed.
The EVAP vent solenoid valve is closed.
The EVAP leak detection pump switching valve is in the vent position.
The EVAP leak detection pump vacuum pump is ON.
The odometer greater than 16 km (10 mi).
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The fuel level is between 10 - 90%.
The engine coolant temperature is less than 40°C (104°F).
The intake air temperature is between 4 - 45°C (39 - 113°F).
The system voltage is greater than 10 V.
The vehicle speed is less than 1.6 km/h (1 MPH).
No Vehicle ON during test.
The refueling request button is not pressed.
A service bay test is not active.
The device control is not active.
There are three possible time windows for this test to run. Up to that point and through this time period the propulsion system must not be active. These time windows are: 5.0, 7.0 or 9.5 hours.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P145C
The EVAP leak detection pump is commanded ON during the first reference orifice vacuum measurement and the stabilized EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor vacuum reading is less than 0.1 kPa (0.01 PSI) for greater than 6 min.
Or
The EVAP leak detection pump is commanded ON during the second reference orifice vacuum measurement and the stabilized EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor vacuum reading is less than 0.1 kPa (0.01 PSI) for greater than 30 s.
P145D
The EVAP leak detection pump is commanded OFF for the first time and the EVAP leak detection pump switching valve has transitioned from vent to not venting, pump position. The difference between an initial EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor reading and a second EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor reading is greater than 1 kPa (0.14 PSI) for greater than 8 s.
Or
The EVAP leak detection pump is commanded OFF for the second time and the EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor vacuum reading is greater than 1.18 kPa (0.17 PSI) for greater than 14 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P145C and P145D are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P145C and P145D are Type B DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure parameter compared against the conditions for
setting
If not the specified range
Replace the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly
If within specified range
3. Verify that DTCs P2400, P2401 or P2402 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If no DTCs are set
.
4. Inspect for any aftermarket devices added that might have been spliced into the wire harness circuits that control the EVAP leak detection pump.
Aftermarket devices found
Remove or repair as necessary
No aftermarket devices found
5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
6. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTCs set
Refer to Circuit System Testing.
If the DTC do not set
7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
DTC P145E: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP TO VENT SOLENOID VALVE LEAK DETECTED
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P145E
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump to Vent Solenoid Valve Leak Detected
Circuit/System Description
The EVAP system uses a EVAP leak detection pump to test for system leaks. The EVAP leak detection pump assembly consists of the following components:
EVAP leak detection pump with reference orifice
EVAP leak detection pump switching valve
EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor
This DTC sets when the ECM detects a 0.51 mm (0.020 in) external leak between the EVAP leak detection pump and the EVAP vent solenoid valve or an internal leak through the EVAP vent solenoid valve.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P043E, P043F, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0128, P0449, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P06E4, P0722, P0723, P111E, P1462, P145C, P145D, P145F, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2227, P2228, P2229, P2230, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2450, P24BA, P24BB, P24B9, P2537, P262B, U0073, U0074, U0140 and
U182D is not set.
The EVAP purge valve is closed.
The EVAP vent solenoid valve transitions to closed.
The EVAP leak detection pump switching valve in not venting, pump position.
The EVAP leak detection pump vacuum pump is ON.
The odometer greater than 16 km (10 mi).
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The fuel level is between 10 - 90%.
The engine coolant temperature is less than 40°C (104°F).
The intake air temperature is between 4 - 45°C (39 - 113°F).
The system voltage is greater than 10 V.
The vehicle speed is less than 4.8 km/h (3 MPH).
No Vehicle ON during this test
The refueling request button is not pressed.
A service bay test is not active.
The device control is not active.
There are three possible time windows for this test to run. Up to that point and through this time period the propulsion system must not be active. These time windows are: 5.0, 7.0 or 9.5 h.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects the vacuum reading is less than the reference vacuum for greater than 30 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P145E is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P145E is a Type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
The EVAP system can be filled with smoke at the fresh air side of the vacuum pump using the adapters in the
GE-41413-300
.
Smoke seen coming out of the fresh air side of the EVAP leak detection pump assembly is not consider a failed part. This includes the electrical connection port as diagnostics will not detect a leak on the fresh air side of the system.
To help locate intermittent leaks, use the GE-41413-A to introduce smoke into the EVAP system. Move all the EVAP components while observing for smoke with the GE-41413-SPT .
To improve the visibility of the smoke exiting the EVAP system, observe the suspected leak area from different angles with the
GE-41413-SPT
.
If a small leak is difficult to find, it may be necessary to remove the EVAP components and test them one at a time using the adapters in the
GE-41413-300
.
A vent solenoid stuck in the open position will set this DTC. If the solenoid will not respond to the scan tool command, it may be electrically or mechanically inoperable.
Reference Information
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information Special Tools
GE-41413-300
EVAP Cap And Plug Kit
GE-41413-A
Evaporative Emissions System Tester
GE-41413-SPT
High Intensity White Light
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
WARNING: Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission Pipe Warning .
CAUTION: Refer to Clean, Dry, Low Pressure Gas Source Caution .
1. Verify none of the conditions listed below exist:
Disconnected, incorrectly routed, kinked, or damaged EVAP pipes, O-rings and hoses
A damaged EVAP vent solenoid valve - This could be a shorted solenoid or mechanically stuck.
Refer to Component Testing below.
If a condition exists
Repair as necessary
If no conditions exist
CAUTION: Refer to Fuel and Evaporative Emission Hose/Pipe Connection Cleaning Caution .
NOTE: Refer to the GE-41413-A operation manual for detailed instructions in Evaporative Emission Control System Diagnosis.
2. Disconnect the fresh air tube at the quick connector on the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump.
3. Using adapters in the GE-41413-300 , specifically GE-41413-323 , connect the GE-41413-A .
NOTE: Ensure that the vehicle underbody temperature is similar to the ambient temperature and allow the surrounding air to stabilize before starting the diagnostic procedure. The system flow will be less with higher temperatures.
4. Use the flow meter on the GE-41413-A calibrated to 0.51 mm (0.020 in) determine if there is a leak.
If a leak is detected
Use the GE-41413-A to apply smoke to the EVAP system until the leak is located.
If no leak is detected
5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Ambient and vehicle component temperature must be above 0°C (32°F) to command the switching valve or vacuum pump. This prevents erroneous
results and damage to the EVAP leak detection pump assembly.
1. Record the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump pressure.
2. Command the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump on for 1 min.
1. Record the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump pressure.
2. Subtract the value in step 2.1 from the value in step 1 and record this
3. Command the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump to Vent Solenoid Valve Leak Test for 30 s.
1. Record the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump pressure.
2. Subtract the value in step 3.1 from the value recorded in step 1.
Example: Step 1 value 96.6 kPa (14 PSI)
Example: Step 2 value 93.5 kPa (13.6 PSI)
Example: Step 2.2 value 3.1 kPa (0.4 PSI)
Example: Step 3 value 90.69 kPa (13.15 PSI)
Example: Step 3.2 value 5.91 kPa (0.8 PSI)
4. The recommended ratio should be at least 1.50 of the value in step 2.2.
Example; step 1 minus step 3 = 5.91 kPa (0.85 PSI)
5.91 kPa (0.85 PSI) divided by 3.1 (0.44 PSI) = 1.90 ratio.
If the ratio fails the recommendation
Inspect and repair for any of the conditions noted under Circuit/System Verification, step 1
If the ratio meets or exceeds the recommendation
5. All OK
Component Testing
1. Connect GE-41413-A using adapter J-41413-323 that is part of GE-41413-300 to the fresh air side of the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump.
1. Test the connection between the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve and the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump for a leak.
2. The value should be below the 0.020 in H2O value established above in Circuit/System Verification, step 4.
NOTE: Smoke seen coming out of the fresh air side of the EVAP leak detection pump assembly is not consider a failed part. This includes the electrical connection port as diagnostics will not detect a leak on the fresh air side of the system.
3.
If a leak is detected
Repair the affected component
2. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
3. Test for 25 - 30 Ω between the control terminal 1 and the battery voltage terminal 2.
If not within the specified range
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
If within the specified range
NOTE:
Use the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure sensor parameter as a pressure/vacuum reference source.
Review diagnostic aids listed for P0451-P0453 as these could affect further testing.
4. Connect J 41413-323 to the pump side of the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
5. Test for no air flow through the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve by applying vacuum to the pump side of the valve. It should hold 1 - 2 in Hg (3 - 7 kPa) for 30 s.
If it does not hold vacuum
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
If it does hold vacuum
6. Reconnect the harness connector at the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve, vehicle in Service Mode.
7. Command the scan tool EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve ON and apply vacuum to the pump side of the valve.
8. Verify the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve does not hold vacuum.
If it does hold vacuum
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
If it does not hold vacuum
9. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Control Valve Vacuum Hose Replacement
Refer to
Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement
DTC P1461: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM PRESSURE INCORRECT DURING FUEL FILL DOOR OPEN REQUEST
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P1461
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Pressure Incorrect During Fuel Fill Door Open Request
Circuit/System Description
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 (HPCM2) monitors the fuel tank pressure during a fuel fill door open request. If the fuel tank pressure does not fall within a predetermined range within 30 - 120 s this DTC sets.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The HPCM2 is active.
The fuel fill door open switch is pressed.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 detects the fuel tank pressure sensor reading does not fall within a predetermined value for greater than 30 - 120 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets The DTC P1461 is a type A DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC The DTC P1461 is a type A DTC. Diagnostic Aids
A restriction in the EVAP canister or vent lines that might hold fuel tank pressure could affect this.
This DTC will not prevent the fuel fill door from opening.
A vent valve stuck closed could affect this.
Ensure that the reference port on the fuel tank pressure sensor is unobstructed.
Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Release Systems Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Fuel Fill Door Description and Operation
(Fuel Door)
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, observe and note the fuel tank pressure with a scan tool.
2. Request a refueling event. The fuel tank pressure reading should be at 0 inches of H2O.
If not at specification
Test and repair any vent restriction
If meets specification
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic Repair Verification
after completing the repair.
Refer to Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM and Hybrid/EV Control Module 2 replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P1462: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM REFERENCE ORIFICE FLOW ERRATIC
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P1462
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Reference Orifice Flow Erratic
Circuit/System Description
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system uses a EVAP leak detection pump to test for system leaks. The EVAP leak detection pump assembly consists of the following components:
EVAP leak detection pump with reference orifice
EVAP leak detection pump switching valve
EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor
The engine control module (ECM) monitors the pressure across the reference orifice with the EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor. When all conditions are met, the ECM commands the vacuum pump ON and monitors the EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor. If the ECM detects the pressure is not stabilized, the DTC will set.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P043E, P043F, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0128, P0449, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P06E4, P0722, P0723, P111E, P145C, P145D, P145E, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2227, P2228, P2229, P2230, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2421, P2422, P2450, P24BA, P24BB, P24B9, P2537, P262B, U0073, U0074,
U0140 and U182D is not set.
The vehicle is OFF.
The propulsion system is not active.
The refueling request button is not pressed
A service bay test is not active
The purge valve is closed
The vent solenoid valve is closed
The EVAP Leak Detection Pump switching valve is in the vent position
The EVAP Leak Detection Pump vacuum pump is ON
The odometer is greater than 16 km (10 mi)
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI)
The fuel level is between 10 - 90%
The engine coolant temperature is less than 40°C (104°F)
The intake air temperature is between 4 - 45°C (39 - 113°F)
The system voltage is greater than 10 V
The vehicle speed less than 4.8 km/h (3 MPH)
There are three possible time windows for this test to run. Up to that point, and through this time period, the propulsion system must not be active. These time windows are: 5.0, 7.0 or 9.5 h.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects the EVAP leak detection pump internal reference test did not successfully complete within a calibrated value.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P1462 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P1462 is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the tube and clamps from the EVAP leak detection pump to the vent solenoid for damage. A damage/open tube may allow debris to enter the pump and plug the reference orifice.
Remove the EVAP leak detection pump and look inside the pump opening for any debris that could restrict or plug the reference orifice. The reference orifice is a small opening at the 2 o'clock position in the pump vacuum opening. Inspect for missing or damage O-rings.
With the fresh air tube removed from the EVAP leak detection pump assembly, blow controlled air, 5 - 10 PSI, into this tube. There should be air escaping from behind the fuel fill pocket indicating this tube and filter are not restricted.
A switching valve stuck in the pump position can cause insufficient flow.
This part is not serviceable. It is very important that no debris be found in the pump fresh air inlet or vacuum openings, the tube between the vent solenoid valve and EVAP leak detection pump assembly as this could cause a P043E to set.
Reference Information
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure sensor reading is within the range specified in the Altitude Versus Barometric Pressure table.
3. Record the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure sensor reading.
4. Command the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump ON.
5. Record the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure sensor reading after 6 min. The reading should be 1.18 - 4 kPa (0.17-0.58 PSI) less than the initial reading from step 2.
If not within the specified range
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If within specified range
6. Record the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure sensor reading after monitoring for an additional 5-10 min.
7. The reading should be 1.18 - 4.5 kPa (0.17-0.58 PSI) less than the initial reading from step 2, and the difference between the step 4 and step 5 readings less than 0.51 kpa (.07 PSI)
If not within the specified range
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If within specified range
8. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
9. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC do not set
10. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: The reference orifice is a small opening at the 2 o'clock position in the pump vacuum opening.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
2. Verify the reference orifice within the pump does not have a restriction.
If restricted
Inspect and repair any of the conditions listed below:
The EVAP leak detection pump to the vent solenoid tube and clamps for damage
A missing or damage EVAP leak detection pump O-rings
The fresh air tube near the fuel fill pocket for a restriction
The fresh air tube for a restriction
If not restricted
Replace the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
DTC P1426: EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE INTERNAL PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P1426
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Internal Performance
Circuit/System Description
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve internal performance DTC indicates that the smart EGR valve has determined that an internal error exists (internal to the EGR valve).
Conditions for Running the DTC
Engine speed is between 700 - 5,900 RPM
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met for greater than 5 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P1426
The EGR valve has broadcast the specific duty cycle to the engine control module to indicate internal error condition exists.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P1426 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P1426 is a Type B DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P1426 is not set.
If DTC P1426 is set
Replace the Q14 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve.
If DTC P1426 is not set
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify DTC P1426 does not set.
If DTC P1426 sets
Replace the Q14 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P1427-P142A OR P1437: EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 OR 2 - INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE 1 OR 2 NOT PLAUSIBLE/EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 NOT PLAUSIBLE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P1427
EGR Temperature Sensor 1 - Intake Air Temperature 1 Not Plausible
DTC P1428
EGR Temperature Sensor 1 - Intake Air Temperature 2 Not Plausible
DTC P1429
EGR Temperature Sensor 2 - Intake Air Temperature 1 Not Plausible
DTC P142A
EGR Temperature Sensor 2 - Intake Air Temperature 2 Not Plausible
DTC P1437
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Sensor 1 Not Plausible
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor 1 Signal |
P040C |
P040D |
P040D, P1427, P1428 |
P040D* |
P040B, P1427, P1428 |
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor 1 Low Reference |
- |
P040D |
P040D, P1427, P1428 |
P040D* |
P040B, P1427, P1428 |
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor 2 Signal |
P041C |
P041D |
P041D, P1429, P142A |
P041D* |
P041B, P1429, P142A |
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor 2 Low Reference |
- |
P041D |
P041D, P1429, P142A |
P041D* |
P041B, P1429, P142A |
* Internal ECM or Sensor damage may occur if the circuit is shorted to B+ |
Typical Scan Tool Data
EGT Sensor 1 - 3
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: Ignition On Parameter Normal Range: -39 - 999°C (-38 - 1,830°F) |
|||
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor 1 or 2 Signal |
200°C (392°F) |
200°C (392°F) |
200°C (392°F) |
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor 1 or 2 Low Reference |
- |
200°C (392°F) |
200°C (392°F) |
Circuit/System Description
The exhaust gas temperature sensors are variable resistors that measure the temperature of the exhaust gas. The Engine Control Module (ECM) supplies a 5 V bias to the exhaust gas temperature sensor (EGT) signal circuit and supplies a ground to the low reference circuit. When the EGR temperature sensor is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the EGR temperature increases, the sensor resistance decreases. With high sensor resistance, the ECM detects a higher voltage on the EGR temperature signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the ECM detects a lower voltage on the EGR temperature signal circuit. After an 8 hour engine off soak time, the power up temperature of the exhaust gas temperature sensors are compared to the engine coolant temperature sensor (ECT) to determine if the temperature is plausible.
The following table illustrates the relationship between the temperature of the exhaust gas, and the resistance and voltage seen at the EGT sensor.
Temperature |
Resistance |
Voltage |
Low |
Low |
Low |
High |
High |
High |
Conditions for Running the DTC
P1427, P1428, P1429, and P142A
DTC P00E9, P010B, P0111, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0128, P017B, P017C, P017D, P111E, P117B, P117C, P117D, P117E, P117F, or P262B is not set.
Battery voltage is greater than 11 V
The engine is off for greater than 8 h
The engine is cranking or running
The DTCs run once per drive cycle when the above conditions are met
P1437
Battery voltage is greater than 11 V
The engine speed is between 700 - 5,900 RPM
The engine is cranking or running
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met for 10 s
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P1427, P1428, P1429, and P142A
The ECM detects the difference between the exhaust gas temperature and the engine coolant temperature is greater than 15°C (59°F) after an 8 h engine soak.
P1437
The exhaust gas recirculation valve (EGR) determines that a thermal condition exists where the valve should be shut down for protection, but the ECM has determined that the condition is not plausible because none of the other engine hot conditions exist.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P1427, P1428, P1429, P142A, and P1437 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P1427, P1428, P1429, P142A, and P1437 are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
If the engine has cooled overnight, all exhaust gas temperature sensors and the engine coolant temperature sensor values should display within 3°C (5°F).
After starting a cold engine, the exhaust gas temperature sensors temperature should rise steadily, then stabilize after the engine reaches operating temperature.
High resistance in either circuit of an exhaust gas temperature sensor could set a DTC.
After a code clear, with an existing fault, the EGR temperature sensors briefly display the Typical Scan Tool Data chart fault values to indicate a fault type, then default to 200°C (392°F) after a few seconds.
With a fault present, the sensor reads a software defaulted value of 200°C (392°F) and does not change with an expected temperature increase or decrease.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Component View Reference
Powertrain Component Views
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify no other DTCs are set.
If any other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If no other DTCs are set
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, exchange the suspect harness connector at the B130 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Sensor with the known functioning B130 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Sensor, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the DTC related to the known functioning B130 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Sensor does not set.
If the DTC sets
Test or replace the B130 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Sensor
If the DTC does not set
3. Vehicle OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, install original harness connector to the known functioning B130 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
4. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate low reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 10 Ω
5. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V
7. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
8. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic repair procedure.
Refer to
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler Temperature Sensor Replacement - Position 1
Refer to
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler Temperature Sensor Replacement - Position 2
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P1516, P2101, P2119, OR P2176: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (TAC) MODULE THROTTLE ACTUATOR POSITION PERFORMANCE/THROTTLE CLOSED POSITION PERFORMANCE/MINIMUM THROTTLE POSITION NOT LEARNED
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure:
Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:
Strategy Based Diagnosis
An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
DTC P1516
Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Module Throttle Actuator Position Performance
DTC P2101
Throttle Actuator Position Performance
DTC P2119
Throttle Closed Position Performance
DTC P2176
Minimum Throttle Position Not Learned
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Control - Close |
P1516, P2101 |
P1516, P2101 |
P1516, P2101 |
P1516, P2101, P2176 |
Control - Open |
P1516, P2101, P2119 |
P1516, P2101 |
P1516, P2101 |
P1516, P2101, P2176 |
Circuit/System Description
Circuit |
Description |
Control - Close |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate the component. |
Control - Open |
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate the component. |
Component |
Description |
K20 Engine Control Module |
The control module controls a series of actuators to ensure optimal engine performance. The control module does this by reading values from a variety of sensors, interprets the data and adjusts the engine actuators accordingly. |
Q38 Throttle Body |
The throttle valve is actuated by a bidirectional DC motor. A spring pulls the valve to a rest or default position, in which the valve is almost closed. The throttle actuator motor can push against the force of the spring to open or close the valve. The more current flow through the motor, the more the valve moves. |
The engine control module (ECM) provides the accelerator pedal interface in which the driver requests a vehicle torque. These driver requests are coordinated and arbitrated within the ECM and the final driver requested torque is sent to the hybrid powertrain control module. The hybrid powertrain control module then determines how the torque output will be distributed between the two electric motors and the engine. The ECM achieves throttle positioning by providing a pulse width modulated voltage to the throttle actuator motor.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P1516
DTC P1682 = Not set
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 6.4 V
Throttle Position Learn = Not Activated
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P2101 Condition 1
DTC P1682 = Not set
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 6.4 V
Throttle Position Learn = Not Activated
Engine = Running
Condition 2
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 6.4 V
Throttle Position Learn = Active
Condition 3
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 6.4 V
Reduced Engine Power = Active
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P2119
DTC P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P06A3 = Not set
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 6.4 V
Engine = Not Running
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P2176
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 6.4 V
Throttle Position Learn = Active
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met for greater than 2 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P1516
The following parameters are not within 2% of each other:
Desired Throttle Position
Throttle Position
DTC P2101 Condition 1
The following parameters are not within 10% of each other:
Desired Throttle Position
Throttle Position
Condition 2
Throttle Position Learn = Active
Throttle Position = Greater than 38%
Condition 3
Throttle Position Learn = Active
Throttle Position = Greater than 50%
P2119
The throttle blade has not reached the closed position after the engine has been turned off.
P2176
Minimum Throttle Position Not Learned = Exceeded Number of Attempts
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P1516 is a Type B DTC.
DTCs P2101, P2176 are Type A DTCs.
DTC P2119 is a Type C DTC.
Reduced Engine Power = Active
P16 Instrument Cluster = Reduced Engine Power
Under certain conditions, the control module commands the engine Off.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTC P1516 is a Type B DTC.
DTCs P2101, P2176 are Type A DTCs.
DTC P2119 is a Type C DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
A high resistance condition on the throttle position and throttle actuator control circuits could cause a DTC to set.
A weak battery may cause this DTC to set.
If the throttle blade becomes stuck, a DTC will set. Depending on the position of the throttle blade, the ECM may enter Engine Shutdown Mode. The ECM will disable fuel and de-energize the throttle actuator. If the condition remains present during the next ignition cycle, the ECM may disable engine cranking.
Inspect the throttle body assembly for a stuck throttle blade if a throttle actuator DTC is current and the engine won't crank.
Inspect for a condition in which the throttle blade may have been held open. For example, ice may have formed in the throttle bore causing the throttle blade not to close.
Under cold start conditions, it might happen briefly that the desired and the actual throttle blade position do not match.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0121, P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P0562, P0621, P0622, P16A0-P16A2, P2135 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify the scan tool parameter: Throttle Body Idle Air Flow Compensation = Less than 90%
If 90% or greater
Refer to: Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning .
If less than 90%
4. Clear the DTCs.
5. Vehicle Off and all vehicle systems Off.
6. Vehicle in Service Mode.
7. Perform the scan tool control function: Throttle Sweep Verify the scan tool parameter: TAC Motor = Enabled
If not the specified state
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
If the specified state
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: TAC Motor = Enabled Perform the action while monitoring the parameter:
Wiggle the harness and connector: Q38 Throttle Body
Wiggle the harness and connector: K20 Engine Control Module
If not the specified state
Repair as necessary - Wiring / Terminal(s) / Electrical Connector(s)
If the specified state
9. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
10. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
If the DTC does not set
11. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Verify the following conditions do not exist:
WARNING: Turn OFF the ignition before inserting fingers into the throttle bore. Unexpected movement of the throttle blade could cause personal injury.
The throttle blade has not reached the closed position after the engine has been turned off.
The throttle blade is not closed by the spring.
The throttle blade is binding in open or closed position.
If a condition exists
Replace the component: Q38 Throttle Body
If no condition exists
NOTE: Disconnecting the component electrical connector causes additional DTCs to set.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector: Q38 Throttle Body
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Test for 6 to 8 V between the test points:
Control circuit terminal 1 & Ground
Control circuit terminal 2 & Ground
If less than 6 V
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:
Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:
Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control module harness
Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control module harness
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If greater than 8 V
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:
Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If between 6 and 8 V
6. Vehicle Off.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K20 Engine Control Module
8. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:
Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control module harness
Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control module harness
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms
9. Test or replace the component: Q38 Throttle Body
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
Refer to
Throttle Body Assembly Replacement
For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to:
Control Module References
DTC P15F2: ENGINE TORQUE COMMAND SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P15F2
Engine Torque Command Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the engine control module (ECM). The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is internal to the power inverter module, often referred to as the drive motor generator power inverter module, and is not serviced separately. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 sends an engine torque requested message to the ECM over the serial data circuits. The ECM monitors the data to verify the indicated engine torque requested calculation is correct. The ECM processor monitors the data to verify that the engine torque command is correct.
Conditions for Running the DTC
Vehicle ON.
The system voltage is 8 - 18 V.
DTC U1817 is not set.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The control module has detected an internal malfunction.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P15F2 is a Type A DTC.
The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 requests the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 2 to open the high voltage contactor relays.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P15F2 is a Type A DTC. Reference Information
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Diagnose and repair any communication DTCs prior to performing this testing.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P15F2 is not set.
If the DTC is set
1. Program the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the DTC does not set.
3. All OK
If the DTC is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for K20 Engine Control Module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P15F9: HYBRID/EV SYSTEM ENGINE SPEED CONTROL INTERVENTION REQUEST TYPE SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for a overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P15F9
Hybrid/EV System Engine Speed Control Intervention Request Type Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
The hybrid/EV powertrain control module is constantly sending serial data messages to the ECM regarding the operating state of the powertrain propulsion system. These messages are sent in a continuously repeating series of rolling counts with associated password protect samples. Each count/sample is assigned a value. The ECM uses the values, during a propulsion system mode shift, to determine when and at what RPM to idle the internal combustion engine. When the ECM determines that too many of the counts/samples contain an error value, the ECM sets DTC P15F9.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC U1817 is not set.
The engine run time is greater than 0.5 s.
No other CAN errors are present.
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that 10 of 16 counts/samples contain an error value.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P15F9 is a Type B DTC Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P15F9 is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids
An intermittent fault in the CAN circuits will cause the ECM to set DTC P15F9.
Reference Information
Description and Operation
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE:
Correct any engine control DTCs before diagnosing hybrid/EV powertrain control module DTCs.
DTC P15F9 is an informational DTC.
1. Verify there are no engine control or communication DTCs set.
If a DTC is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If a DTC is not set
2. Verify there are no hybrid/EV powertrain control module DTCs set.
If a DTC is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If a DTC is not set
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
DTC P15FB: BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for a overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P15FB
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Circuit/System Description
The electronic brake control module (EBCM) monitors the brake pedal position sensor in order to provide emission related brake pedal position information to the engine control module (ECM). The EBCM sends the information, via the serial data circuit, to the ECM in a continuously repeating series of 16 rolling counts, with each count assigned a value. When the ECM determines that too many of the counts have an incorrect value, the ECM sets DTC P15FB.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The vehicle is ON.
DTC P15FB runs continuously when the above condition is met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that too many of the rolling counts have an incorrect value.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P15FB is a Type B DTC.
Brake pedal position is defaulted to 0 for as long as the fault is active.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P15FB is a Type B DTC. Reference Information Description and Operation
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information.
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE:
DTC P15FB is an informational DTC.
Diagnose all other engine control module DTCs prior to DTC P15FB.
1. Verify that no other DTCs are set except for DTC P15FB.
If any other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If only DTC P15FB is set
2. Replace the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module.
3. Verify the DTC does not set while operating the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC.
If DTC sets
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If DTC does not set
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Refer to Control Module References for Electronic Brake Control Module and Engine Control Module replacement, programming and setup
DTC P162D: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM ALARM CLOCK SIGNAL NOT
RECEIVED
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P162D
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Alarm Clock Signal Not Received
Circuit/System Description
Whenever the propulsion system goes active, the diagnostic reads its internal timer and evaluates the results from the wake-up events that could have occurred. If the ECM did not receive feedback from the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 that the alarm clock was set and the ECM did not wake up, then the DTC will set.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC's P0502, P0503, P0722, P0723, P262B, U0140, U182D, U0073, U0074 or P2537 is not set.
Drive distance of greater than 0.1 mi
A service bay test is not active
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The vehicle must sit at least 6 h before the system goes to propulsion system active. At propulsion system active, if the ECM did not receive feedback from the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 that the alarm clock was set, and any one of the three wake-up timer events did not occur, then the DTC fails.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The control modules are never signaled; therefore the specific subsystems will not function.
The MIL will illuminate after the 2nd ignition cycle.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P162D is a type B DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference
Data Communication Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that DTC P162D is set.
If DTC P162D is set along with other DTCs set
Diagnose all other DTCs first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If DTC P162D is set without other DTCs set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If DTC P162D is not set
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the following:
The control modules that share the K20 Engine Control Module terminals X1 29 and 43 High Speed GMLAN and X1 1 and 15 High Voltage Management and Powertrain Expansion Buss serial data circuits.
1. Vehicle OFF, all systems OFF, all keys at least 3 meters away from vehicle, all access doors closed. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K40 Engine Control Module and K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the serial data circuits end to end between the K20 Engine Control Module and K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
If 2 Ω or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
If less than 2 Ω
Replace the K114B Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2.
3. Verify that DTC P162D does not set again.
If the DTC sets
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the DTC does not set
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Serial Data Circuit Wiring Repairs
Refer to
Control Module References
for control module replacement, programming and setup
DTC P163A: CONTROL MODULE FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR 1 CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUITRY PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P163A
Control Module Fuel Pressure Regulator 1 Control System Circuitry Performance
Circuit/System Description
This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors the current required to control fuel pressure regulator and compares the current value to calibrated low and high thresholds.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC P0016, P0017, P0090, P0091, P0092, P00C8, P00C9, P00CA, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0128, P0192, P0193, P0335, P0336, P0340, P0341, P0365, P0366, P0627, P0628, P0629,
or P1682 are not present.
The engine is running for greater than 10 s.
Battery voltage is greater than or equal to 11 V.
Low side fuel pressure is greater than 300 kPa (43.5 PSI).
Intake air temperature (IAT) is warmer than or equal to -10°C (14°F).
Barometric pressure is greater than 70 kPa.
Fuel temperature is between -10°C and +132°C (14°F and 270°F).
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the current used to drive the high pressure fuel pump actuator is 0.1 A or less or 11 A or greater for greater than 11 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P163A is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P163A is a Type B DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify no other DTCs are set.
If any other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If no other DTCs are set
3. Verify DTC P163A is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC is not set
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
NOTE: The DMM and test leads must be calibrated to 0 Ω in order to prevent misdiagnosis.
2. Test for 1.09 - 1.21 Ω at 20°C (68°F) between the high control circuit terminal 2 and the low control circuit terminal 1 on the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump.
If not between 1.09 - 1.21 Ω
Replace the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump.
If between 1.09 - 1.21 Ω
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the high control circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the high control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
5. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the low control circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the low control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
6. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the high control circuit terminal 2 and B+.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the high control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
7. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the low control circuit terminal 1 and B+.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the low control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
8. Remove the test lamp, connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the high control circuit terminal 2 and ground.
9. Engine Running.
10. Verify the Fuel Pressure Regulator High Control Circuit Low Voltage Test Status transitions from OK to Malfunction.
If Malfunction is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the fused jumper, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the high control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If Malfunction is displayed
11. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the low control circuit terminal 1 and B+.
12. Verify the Fuel Pressure Regulator Control Circuit High Voltage Test Status transitions from OK to Malfunction.
If Malfunction is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the fused jumper, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If Malfunction is displayed
13. Test or replace the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump.
Component Testing
Static Test
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump.
NOTE: The DMM and test leads must be calibrated to 0 Ω in order to prevent misdiagnosis.
2. Test for 1.09 - 1.21 Ω at 20°C (68°F) between the high control circuit terminal 2 and the low control circuit terminal 1.
If not between 1.09 - 1.21 Ω
Replace the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump.
If between 1.09 - 1.21 Ω
3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal and the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump housing.
If less than infinite resistance
Replace the G18 High Pressure Fuel Pump.
If infinite resistance
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Fuel Injection Pump Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup
DTC P2096 OR P2097: POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM LOW/HIGH LIMIT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P2096
Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Low Limit
DTC P2097
Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System High Limit
Circuit Description
Fuel trim bias is used to keep the post catalyst air/fuel ratio within a predetermined range. This allows optimal catalyst efficiency under various operating conditions. The engine control module (ECM) constantly monitors how lean or rich the fuel trim bias is commanded, to determine if the fuel trim bias is greater than a calibrated amount.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC P0016, P0017, P0030, P0036, P0053, P0054, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0128, P0131, P0132, P0133, P0134, P0135, P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F, P0140, P0141, P015A, P015B, P0178, P0179, P0201, P0202, P0203, P0204, P0261, P0262, P0264, P0265, P0267, P0268, P0270, P0271, P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0340, P0341, P0365, P0366, P0411, P0442, P0443, P0446, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0458, P0459, P0496, P0498, P0499, P111E, P1133, P1248, P1249, P124A, P124B, P2147, P2148, P2150, P2151, P2153, P2154, P2156, P2157, P219A, P2227, P2228, P2229, P2230, P2269, P2270, P2271, P2440, P2444, or P2A00 is not set.
The barometric pressure (BARO) is greater than 70 kPa (10.2 PSI).
The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) is between 0 - 200 kPa (0 - 29 PSI).
The intake air temperature (IAT) is between -20°C and +200°C (-4 and +392°F).
The start up engine coolant temperature is warmer than -20°C (-4°F).
The fuel control intrusive diagnostics are not active.
The engine is operating under light acceleration, heavy acceleration, or cruise conditions.
DTCs P2096 and P2097 run continuously when the conditions above have been met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The correction limit for a condition causing a lean or rich air/fuel ratio has been exceeded.
Action Taken when the DTC Sets
DTCs P2096 and P2097 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC
DTCs P2096 and P2097 are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
The post catalyst fuel trim diagnostic is very sensitive to heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) design. A non-OE sensor or an incorrect part number may cause a DTC to set.
Certain aftermarket air filters may cause a DTC to set.
Certain aftermarket air induction systems or modifications to the air induction system may cause a DTC
to set.
Certain aftermarket exhaust system components may cause a DTC to set.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Component View Reference
Powertrain Component Views
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify no other HO2S or fuel trim DTC is set.
If any other HO2S or fuel trim DTC is set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for further diagnosis.
If no other HO2S or fuel trim DTC is set
3. Verify DTC P2096 or P2097 is not set.
If a DTC is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If no DTC is set
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed in the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify DTC P2096 or P2097 is not set.
If a DTC is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If no DTC is set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
Inspect for the conditions listed below:
P2096
Air intake duct collapsed or restricted.
Air filter dirty or restricted.
Objects blocking the throttle body.
Excessive fuel in the crankcase. Change engine oil as necessary.
Rich fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis
.
Excessive fuel system pressure. Refer to
Fuel System Diagnosis
.
Fuel contamination. Refer to
Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis.
Fuel saturation of the evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister
Stuck open or leaking EVAP purge valve
Restricted exhaust. Refer to
Symptoms - Engine Exhaust
.
Improperly operating crankcase ventilation system. Refer to
Crankcase Ventilation System
Inspection/Diagnosis
.
P2097
Exhaust system leaks. Refer to
Symptoms - Engine Exhaust
.
Split, kinked, or improperly connected vacuum hoses
Insufficient fuel in the tank
Leaks in the air induction system and air intake ducts
Missing air filter element
Cracked evaporative canister
Evaporative pipes plugged, obstructed, or leaking
Crankcase ventilation system leaking. Refer to
Crankcase Ventilation System Inspection/Diagnosis
.
Engine vacuum leaks
Low fuel system pressure. Refer to
Fuel System Diagnosis
.
Contaminated fuel. Refer to
Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis.
Lean fuel injectors. Refer to Fuel Injector Diagnosis.
If a condition is found
Repair as necessary.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. Perform the scan tool Fuel Trim Reset after completing the repair.
DTC P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, OR P2138: ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR 1-2 CIRCUIT VOLTAGE/ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSORS 1-2 NOT PLAUSIBLE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P2122
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2123
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2127
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2128
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2138
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensors 1 - 2 Not Plausible
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1 5 V Reference |
P06A3 |
P2122, P2138 |
P06A3, P2135 |
P2138 |
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 2 5 V Reference |
P0106, P0107, P0108, P0697 |
P2127, P2138 |
P0106, P0107, P0108, P0697 |
P2138 |
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1 Signal |
P2122 |
P2122, P2138 |
P2123 |
P2138 |
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 2 Signal |
P2127 |
P2127, P2138 |
P2128, P2138 |
P2138 |
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 1 Low Reference |
- |
P2123, P2138 |
- |
P2138 |
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor 2 Low Reference |
- |
P2128, P2138 |
- |
P2138 |
Typical Scan Tool Data
APP Sensor 1
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: The engine is operating. Parameter Normal Range: APP Sensor 1 0.88 - 1.08 V |
|||
APP Sensor 1 5 V Reference |
0.00 V |
0.00 V |
2 - 3 V |
APP Sensor 1 Signal |
0.00 V |
0.00 V |
4 - 5 V |
APP Sensor 1 Low Reference |
- |
4 - 5 V |
- |
APP Sensor 2
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: The engine is operating. Parameter Normal Range: APP Sensor 2 0.39 - 0.59 V |
|||
APP Sensor 2 5 V Reference |
0.00 V |
0.00 V |
1 - 3 V |
APP Sensor 2 Signal |
0.00 V |
0.00 V |
2 - 5 V |
APP Sensor 2 Low Reference |
- |
4 - 5 V |
- |
Circuit/System Description
The accelerator pedal assembly contains 2 accelerator pedal position (APP) sensors. The APP sensors are mounted to the accelerator pedal assembly and are not serviceable. The APP sensors provide a signal voltage that changes relative to pedal position. The engine control module (ECM) supplies each APP sensor with a 5 V reference circuit, a low reference circuit, and a signal circuit. Both the APP sensors 1 and 2 signal percentages increase as the pedal is depressed, from approximately 0% at rest to above 95% when fully depressed.
The ECM provides the accelerator pedal position or driver torque request to the hybrid powertrain control module. The hybrid powertrain control module determines how the torque output will be distributed between the two electric motors and the engine.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128
DTC P0697 is not set - P2127 or P2128.
DTC P06A3 is not set - P2122 or P2123.
The ignition is ON or the engine is running.
The run/crank voltage is greater than 6.4 V.
The DTCs run continuously when the above conditions are met.
P2138
DTCs P06A3, P0697, P2122, P2123, P2127, or P2128 are not set.
The ignition is ON or the engine is running.
The run/crank voltage is greater than 6.4 V.
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P2122
The ECM detects that the APP sensor 1 voltage is less than 0.46 V for greater than 1 s.
P2123
The ECM detects that the APP sensor 1 voltage is greater than 4.7 V for greater than 1 s.
P2127
The ECM detects that the APP sensor 2 voltage is less than 0.32 V for greater than 1 s.
P2128
The ECM detects that APP sensor 2 voltage is greater than 2.6 V for greater than 0.5 s.
P2138
The voltage difference between APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2 exceeds a predetermined value for greater than 1 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P2122, P2123, P2127, and P2128, and P2138 are Type A DTCs.
A message center displays Propulsion Power is Reduced.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P2122, P2123, P2127, and P2128, and P2138 are Type A DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
A high resistance condition on the accelerator pedal sensor circuits could cause a DTC to set.
Ensure that the in-line harness connector seals are installed correctly. Improper installation could result in water intrusion into the connector and cause a DTC to set.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0697 or P06A3 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to DTC P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3, or P06D2 for further diagnosis.
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify the APP Sensor 1 Circuit Status and APP Sensor 2 Circuit Status displays OK.
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If OK is displayed
4. Verify the scan tool APP Sensor 1 and 2 Agree/Disagree parameter displays Agree while performing the tests listed below:
Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal from the rest position to the wide open throttle position (WOT) and release pedal. Repeat the procedure several times.
Slowly depress the accelerator pedal to WOT and then slowly return the pedal to closed throttle.
Repeat the procedure several times.
If Disagree
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If Agree
5. Verify that DTC P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, or P2138 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If none of the DTCs set
6. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
7. Verify DTC P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, or P2138 is not set.
If any DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If no DTCs set
8. All OK
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B107 accelerator pedal assembly. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between each low reference circuit terminal listed below and ground.
Low reference circuit terminal 4 or A
Low reference circuit terminal 5 or D
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 engine control module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 engine control module.
If less than 5 Ω
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between each 5 V reference circuit terminal listed below and ground.
5 V reference circuit terminal 1 or C
5 V reference circuit terminal 2 or F
If less than 4.8 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 engine control module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 engine control module.
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 engine control module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 engine control module.
If between 4.8 - 5.2 V
5. Verify each APP sensor voltage parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 engine control module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal listed below and ground.
APP sensor 1 signal circuit terminal 3 or E
APP sensor 2 signal circuit terminal 6 or B
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 engine control module.
If less than 0.2 V
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between each signal circuit terminal listed below and the 5 V reference circuit terminal 1.
APP sensor 1 signal circuit terminal 3 or E
APP sensor 2 signal circuit terminal 6 or B
7. Verify the scan tool APP sensor voltage parameter is greater than 4.8 V.
If 4.8 V or less
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 engine control module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 engine control module.
If greater than 4.8 V
8. Test or replace the B107 accelerator pedal assembly.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Accelerator Pedal Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P2199: INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR 1-2 NOT PLAUSIBLE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P2199
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor 1-2 Not Plausible
Diagnostic Fault Information
IAT Sensor 1
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Signal |
P0112, P0114, P2199 |
P0111, P0113, P0114, P2199 |
P0113*, P0114, P2199 |
P0111, P2199 |
Low Reference |
- |
P0113, P2199, P2227, P2229 |
P0113*, P0114 |
- |
*Internal ECM or sensor damage may occur if the circuit is shorted to B+. |
IAT Sensor 2 and Intake Air Humidity
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Ignition Voltage |
P0096, P0097, P00F4, P0102, P2199 |
P0096, P0097, P00F4, P0102, P2199 |
- |
P0096 |
Signal |
P0097, P00F4, P2199 |
P0097, P00F4, P2199 |
P0097*, P00F4*, P2199* |
P0096 |
Ground |
- |
P0096, P0097, P00F4, P0102, P2199 |
- |
P0096 |
*Internal ECM or sensor damage may occur if the circuit is shorted to B+. |
Typical Scan Tool Data
IAT Sensor 1
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open or High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: Engine Running Parameter Normal Range: Varies with ambient temperature |
|||
Signal |
150°C (302°F) |
-40°C (-40°F) |
-40°C (-40°F)* |
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open or High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Low Reference |
- |
-40°C (-40°F) |
-40°C (-40°F)* |
*Internal ECM or sensor damage may occur if the circuit is shorted to B+ |
IAT Sensor 2 and Intake Air Humidity
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open or High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: Engine Running Parameter Normal Range: Varies with ambient humidity, temperature, and engine bay conditions |
|||
Ignition Voltage |
-40°C (-40°F) 10 Hz 0% |
-40°C (-40°F) 10 Hz 0% |
- |
Signal |
-40°C (-40°F) 10 Hz 100% |
-40°C (-40°F) 10 Hz 0% |
-40°C (-40°F) 10 Hz* 0% |
Ground |
- |
-40°C (-40°F) 10 Hz 0% |
- |
*Internal ECM or sensor damage may occur if the circuit is shorted to B+ |
Circuit/System Description
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 1 is a variable resistor that measures the temperature of the air in the sensor bore. The engine control module (ECM) supplies 5 V to the IAT sensor 1 signal circuit and a ground for the IAT sensor 1 low reference circuit. The signal varies with inlet air temperature and is displayed by the scan tool as °C (°F).
The IAT sensor 2 produces a frequency signal, based on the inlet air temperature, which is equal to the humidity present within the sensor bore. The signal varies with inlet air temperature and is displayed by the scan tool as °C (°F) and Hertz (Hz) and the relative humidity is displayed in percent (%). The ECM supplies a regulated voltage to the signal circuit. The signal circuit is shared by the IAT sensor 2 and the humidity sensor. Ignition voltage and ground circuits are also supplied to the multifunction intake air sensor's internal circuits for these sensors:
IAT sensor 2
Humidity sensor
MAF sensor
The multifunction intake air sensor houses the following:
IAT sensor 1
IAT sensor 2
Humidity sensor
MAF sensor
BARO pressure sensor
IAT Sensor 1 - Temperature, Resistance, Voltage Table
IAT Sensor 1 |
IAT Sensor 1 Resistance |
IAT Sensor 1 Signal Voltage |
Cold |
High |
High |
Warm |
Low |
Low |
IAT Sensor 2 - Temperature, Frequency Table
IAT Sensor 2 |
IAT Sensor 2 Frequency |
IAT Sensor 2 Temperature |
Cold |
45 Hz |
-40°C (-40°F) |
Warm |
302 Hz |
104°C (219°F) |
Conditions for Running the DTC
The ignition is ON.
Ignition 1 voltage is at least 11 V.
This DTC runs continuously within the enabling conditions.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the absolute difference between the IAT sensor 1 and the IAT sensor 2 temperatures is greater than 55°C (99°F) for longer than 5 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P2199 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC DTC P2199 is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids
With the ignition ON, the engine OFF, if the engine is cold, a properly functioning IAT sensor 2 will gradually increase the scan tool IAT Sensor 2 parameter. This is due to the heat that is generated by the multifunction intake air sensor heating elements.
The humidity sensor and the IAT sensor 2 signals are sent to the ECM on the same circuit. If the IAT Sensor 2 parameter displays the values: 10 Hz; -40°C (-40°F), and there are Humidity Sensor DTCs, check for a circuit problem.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Powertrain Component Views
Powertrain Component Views
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information Special Tools
EL-38522-A Variable Signal Generator
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode
2. Verify that DTC P0097, P0098, P0099, P00F4, P00F5, P00F6, P0102, P0103, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3 or P06D2 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for further diagnosis.
If none of the DTCs are set
NOTE: To minimize the effects of residual engine heat and sensor internal heating elements, perform Steps 3 and 4 of this verification procedure only if the ignition has been OFF for 8 hours or more.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the following scan tool parameters are within 30°C (54°F) of each other.
Start-Up IAT Sensor 1
IAT Sensor 2
If not within 30°C (54°F)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If within 30°C (54°F)
5. Vehicle ON, verify the following scan tool parameters are between: -38 and +149°C (-36 and
+300°F).
IAT Sensor 1
IAT Sensor 2
If not between: -38 and +149°C (-36 and +300°F)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If between: -38 and +149°C (-36 and +300°F)
6. Operate the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the freeze frame/failure records data.
7. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
8. All OK
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with Circuit/System Testing.
1. Check the integrity of the entire air induction system and verify that none of the following conditions exist:
A restricted or collapsed air intake duct
An intake manifold leak
A misaligned or damaged air intake duct
Any water intrusion in the induction system
If a condition exists
Repair or replace component as appropriate.
If no condition exists
2. Vehicle OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, it may take up to 2 min. for all vehicle systems to power down. Disconnect the harness connector at the B75C Multifunction Intake Air sensor.
3. Test for less than 5 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open or high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 5 Ω
4. Vehicle OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 7 and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open or high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
If less than 5 Ω
5. Vehicle in Service Mode.
6. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, the fuse for the ignition voltage circuit, and disconnect all components on the circuit.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ignition voltage circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp and remove the fuse for the ignition voltage circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition voltage circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, test all components connected to the ignition circuit, replace as necessary.
If a test lamp illuminates
7. Vehicle in Service Mode.
8. Verify the scan tool Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 parameter is colder than -39°C (-38°F).
If warmer than -39°C (-38°F).
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If colder than -39°C (-38°F).
9. Vehicle OFF, install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the IAT 1 signal circuit terminal 1 and the low reference circuit terminal 3, vehicle in Service Mode.
10. Verify the scan tool Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 parameter is warmer than 148°C (298°F).
If colder than 148°C (298°F).
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If warmer than 148°C (298°F).
11. Vehicle in Service Mode.
NOTE: The intake air temperature sensor 2 signal circuit is pulled up with low current voltage within the controller. Normally, a voltage near B+ can be measured on the circuit with a DMM, but the current will not be high enough to illuminate a test lamp.
12. Verify the scan tool Intake Air Humidity Sensor parameter is less than 1%.
If 1% or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the IAT 2 signal circuit terminal 8 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 1%
13. Vehicle OFF, install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the IAT 2 signal circuit terminal 8 and the low reference circuit terminal 3, vehicle in Service Mode.
14. Verify the scan tool Intake Air Humidity Sensor parameter is greater than 99%.
If 99% or less
NOTE: If the signal circuit is shorted to a voltage the engine control module or the sensor may be damaged.
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire and disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the IAT 2 signal circuit terminal 8 and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V.
3. Vehicle OFF.
4. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 99%
15. Test or replace the B75C Multifunction Intake Air sensor.
Component Testing
Multifunction Intake Air Sensor
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor.
2. Connect a DMM between the IAT sensor 1 signal terminal 1 and the low reference terminal 3
NOTE: A thermometer can be used to test the sensor off the vehicle.
3. Test the IAT sensor 1 by varying the sensor temperature while monitoring the sensor resistance. Compare the readings with the Temperature Versus Resistance - Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Hitachi sensor) table for Hitachi Sensors. The resistance values should be in range of the table values.
If not within the specified range
Replace the B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor.
If within the specified range
4. All OK.
Multifunction Intake Air Sensor
1. Test the IAT Sensor 2 by varying the sensor temperature while monitoring the air temperature with a thermometer. Compare the readings with the scan tool IAT Sensor 2 parameter. The values should be within 5%.
If not within the specified range
Replace the B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor.
If within the specified range
2. All OK.
Dynamic Testing
NOTE: In-correct diagnosis will result if Circuit/System Testing is not completed before performing the following test.
1. Perform the following test using a EL-38522-A Variable Signal Generator or equivalent, if available.
2. Vehicle OFF, connect the leads of the EL-38522-A Variable Signal Generator as follows:
1. Red lead to the signal circuit terminal 8 at the harness connector
2. Black leads to ground
3. Battery voltage supply lead to B+
3. Set the EL-38522-A Variable Signal Generator to the following specifications.
Signal switch to 5 V
Duty Cycle switch to 50% (Normal)
Frequency switch to 250 Hz
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Verify the scan tool IAT Sensor 2 parameters listed below are within the ranges listed below:
IAT Sensor 2 is between 248 - 252 Hz
NOTE: Changing the frequency should cause a warmer or colder IAT 2 temperature.
IAT Sensor 2 is between 70 - 76°C (160 - 166°F)
NOTE: Increasing or decreasing the duty cycle should have an inverse affect on humidity.
Intake Air Humidity Sensor is between 48 - 52%
If a parameter is not within the specified range
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If all the parameters are within the specified range
6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Mass Airflow Sensor Replacement
for multifunction intake air sensor replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for engine control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P219A: FUEL TRIM CYLINDER BALANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P219A
Fuel Trim Cylinder Balance
Circuit/System Description
The Fuel Trim Cylinder Balance diagnostic detects a rich or lean cylinder to cylinder air/fuel ratio imbalance. The diagnostic monitors the pre-catalyst heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) signal's frequency and amplitude characteristics by calculating an accumulated voltage over a predetermined sample period. An imbalance is indicated when multiple samples of the accumulated voltage are consistently higher than the desired value.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P0016, P0017, P0030, P0036, P0053, P0054, P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0019, P0122, P0123, P0128, P0131-P0135, P0137, P0138, P013A, P013B, P013E, P013F, P0140, P0141, P0171, P0172, P0201-P0204, P0222, P0223, P0261, P0262, P0264, P0265,
P0267, P0268, P0270, P0271, P0300, P0301-P0304, P0340, P0341, P0365, P0366, P0411, P0442, P0455, P0458, P0496, P111E, P1133, P1248, P1249, P124A, P124B, P16A0, P16A1, P16A2, P16F3, P2101, P2135, P2147, P2148, P2150, P2151, P2153, P2154, P2156, P2157, P2270, P2271, P2440, P2444 or
P2A00 are not set.
The evaporative emission system device control and intrusive diagnostics are not active.
The engine overspeed protection is not active.
The engine is in closed loop status.
The system voltage is greater than 11 V.
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is warmer than -20°C (-4°F).
The engine speed is between 1,200 - 4,000 RPM.
The mass air flow is between 0 - 100 g/s.
The secondary air injection pump (if equipped) is not ON.
The Exhaust Camshaft Position and Intake Camshaft Position are between 0 - 35 degrees.
Engine run time is greater than 30 s.
Fuel level is greater than 10% and no fuel level sensor fault is present.
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions have been met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Multiple samples of the pre-catalyst HO2S accumulated voltage are consistently greater than the desired value.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P219A is a Type A DTC. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC DTC P219A is a Type A DTC. Diagnostic Aids
The fuel trim cylinder balance diagnostic is very sensitive to heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) design. A non-OE sensor or an incorrect part number may cause a DTC to set.
Monitoring the misfire current counters, or misfire graph, may help to isolate the cylinder that is causing the condition.
Certain aftermarket air filters may cause a DTC to set.
Certain aftermarket air induction systems or modifications to the air induction system may cause a DTC to set.
Certain aftermarket exhaust system components may cause a DTC to set.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Component View Reference
Powertrain Component Views
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Troubleshooting with a Test Lamp
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Connector Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify no other DTCs are set.
If any other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle for further diagnosis.
If no other DTCs are set
3. Verify DTC P219A is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC is not set
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed in the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify DTC P219A is not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Engine running, transmission in Park or Neutral.
2. Verify the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor parameter is between 20 - 48 kPa.
If not within the specified range
.
Refer to DTC P0106 .
If within the specified range
3. Inspect for the conditions listed below:
Modified, damaged, leaking, or restricted air induction system components.
Improperly operating crankcase ventilation system. Refer to
Crankcase Ventilation System
Inspection/Diagnosis
.
Split, kinked, or improperly connected vacuum hoses.
Restricted, damaged, leaking, or modified exhaust system from the catalytic converter forward.
Refer to Symptoms - Engine Exhaust .
Improperly operating fuel injectors. Refer to
Fuel Injector Diagnosis
.
Fuel contamination. Refer to
Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis
.
Excessive fuel in the crankcase due to leaking injectors. Change engine oil as necessary.
Improperly operating ignition system. Refer to Electronic Ignition System Diagnosis
.
If a condition is found
Repair as necessary.
If no condition is found
Test the engine for any mechanical conditions such as sticking valves, lifters, etc., which could alter the flow into the combustion chamber. Refer to Symptoms - Engine Mechanical .
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. Perform the scan tool Fuel Trim Reset after completing the repair.
DTC P2227-P2230: BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (BARO) SENSOR
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure:
Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:
Strategy Based Diagnosis
An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
NOTE: This procedure may also diagnose malfunctions that are not detected by a DTC.
DTC P2227
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Performance
DTC P2228
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2229
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2230
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Erratic
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
5 V Reference |
P00C7, P057C, P0651, P2227, P2228, P25BA |
P2227, P2228 |
P0651, P2227, P2229 |
P2227 |
Signal |
P2227, P2228 |
P2227, P2229 |
P2227, P2229 |
P2227 |
Low Reference |
- |
P0113, P0118, P0119, P040D, P040E, P041D, P041E, P2199, P2227, P2229 |
- |
P2227 |
Typical Scan Tool Data
BARO
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open |
Short to Voltage |
Operating Conditions: Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode & Engine - Off Parameter Normal Range: 56 to 105 kPa (8.1 to 15.2 PSI) |
|||
5 V Reference |
0 kPa (0 PSI) |
0 kPa (0 PSI) |
127 kPa (18.4 PSI) |
Signal |
0 kPa (0 PSI) |
127 kPa (18.4 PSI) |
127 kPa (18.4 PSI) |
Low Reference |
- |
127 kPa (18.4 PSI) |
- |
Circuit/System Description
Circuit |
Description |
5 V Reference |
Regulated voltage supplied by the control module. |
Signal |
The control module input circuit has an internal resistance connected to 5 V. |
Low Reference |
Grounded through the control module. |
Component |
Description |
B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor |
The assembly has several functions: |
Component |
Description |
|
|
K20 Engine Control Module |
The control module controls a series of actuators to ensure optimal engine performance. The control module does this by reading values from a variety of sensors, interprets the data and adjusts the engine actuators accordingly. |
Component |
Description |
B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor |
The barometric pressure sensor generates an analog voltage that is proportional to the ambient air pressure. |
K20 Engine Control Module |
The control module controls a series of actuators to ensure optimal engine performance. The control module does this by reading values from a variety of sensors, interprets the data and adjusts the engine actuators accordingly. |
The barometric pressure sensor is integrated into the multifunction intake air sensor.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P2227 Condition 1
DTC P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P1516, P2101, P2135, P2228, P2229 = Not set
Engine Running = For greater than 30 s
Condition 2
DTC P0106, P0107, P0108, P2228, P2229, P2230, P2610 = Not set
Ignition = On
Engine Off = For greater than 6 min
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
P2228, P2229
Engine Running = For greater than 30 s
DTC runs continuously when the above condition is met.
P2230
DTC P0068, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P1516, P2101, P2135, P2228, P2229 = Not set
Ignition = On
DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P2227 Condition 1
BARO & Calculated BARO = Not within 15 kPa (2.2 PSI) of each other.
Condition 2
BARO & Calculated BARO = Not within 20 kPa (3.0 PSI) of each other.
P2228
BARO = Less than 2 V - For greater than 5 s
P2229
BARO = Greater than 4.5 V - For greater than 5 s
P2230
BARO = Signal noisy or erratic - For greater than 5 s
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P2227, P2228, P2229, P2230 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P2227, P2228, P2229, P2230 are Type B DTCs.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Component View Reference
Disassembled Views
Description and Operation
Engine Control Module Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0106, P0107, P0108, P0641, P0651, P0697, P06A3 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Determine the current vehicle testing altitude.
4. Verify the scan tool parameter: MAP Sensor = The value should be within the range listed in the table:
Altitude Versus Barometric Pressure
If not in the specified range
Refer to: DTC P0106
If in the specified range
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: BARO = The value should be within the range listed in the table: Altitude Versus Barometric Pressure
If not in the specified range
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
If in the specified range
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: BARO = The value should not spike or drop out.
Perform the action while monitoring the parameter:
Wiggle the harness and connector: B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor
Wiggle the harness and connector: K20 Engine Control Module
If the value spikes or drops out
Repair as necessary - Wiring / Terminal(s) / Electrical Connector(s)
If the value does not spike or drop out
7. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
8. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
If the DTC is not set
9. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.
1. Vehicle Off and all vehicle systems Off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 3 & Ground
If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect the electrical connector: K20 Engine Control Module
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 3 @ Component harness & Terminal 43 X2 @ Control module harness
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If less than 10 ohms
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Test for 4.8 to 5.2 V between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 2 & Low Reference circuit terminal 3
If less than 4.8 V
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K20 Engine Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Terminal 14 X3 @ Control module harness
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K20 Engine Control Module
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If between 4.8 and 5.2 V
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: BARO = Greater than 4.7 V
If 4.7 V or less
1. Vehicle Off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K20 Engine Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness & Ground
If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If greater than 4.7 V
7. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 4 & Low Reference circuit terminal 3
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: BARO = Less than 0.2 V
If 0.2 V or greater
1. Vehicle Off, remove jumper wire.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K20 Engine Control Module
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness & Ground
If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V
5. Vehicle Off.
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness & Terminal 46 X3 @ Control module harness
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
If less than 0.2 V
9. Test or replace the component: B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
Refer to
Mass Airflow Sensor Replacement
- B75C Multifunction Intake Air Sensor
For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to:
Control Module References
DTC P2400-P2402: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P2400
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Control Circuit
DTC P2401
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Control Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2402
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Control Circuit High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
B+ |
P2400, P2419 |
P2400, P2418 |
- |
Control |
P2401 |
P2400 |
P2402 |
Circuit/System Description
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system uses an EVAP leak detection pump to test for system leaks. The EVAP leak detection pump assembly consists of the following components:
EVAP leak detection pump with reference orifice
EVAP leak detection pump switching valve
EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor
The ECM commands the EVAP leak detection pump control circuit through an internal switch called a driver. The ECM monitors the commanded and actual status of the driver. If the ECM detects they do not match a DTC sets.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P2400, P2401
Voltage low during driver OFF state
The DTC's run continuously when the above conditions are met
P2402
Voltage high during driver ON state
The DTC's run continuously when the above conditions are met
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match for a minimum of 0.25 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P2400, P2401 and P2402 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P2400, P2401 and P2402 are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
The EVAP leak detection pump is very quiet. You might feel it running rather than hear it.
The devices have to be in their commanded state.
Where multiple DTCs set look for a common root cause like battery feeds, grounds, splices, etc.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: This EVAP leak detection pump is very quiet. You might feel it running rather than hear it.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the parameters listed below do not display Malfunction when commanding EVAP Leak Detection Pump ON and OFF with a scan tool.
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Output Circuit High Voltage Test Status
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Output Circuit Open Test Status
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Output Circuit Low Voltage Test Status
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If Malfunction is not displayed
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection
Pump Assembly.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode,
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, test all components connected to the B+ voltage circuit for a short and replace as necessary.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
4. Remove the test lamp.
5. Verify the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Output Circuit High Voltage Test Status is OK when commanding the EVAP Leak Detection Pump ON and OFF with a scan tool.
If OK is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If OK is displayed
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 4 and the B+ circuit terminal 3.
7. Verify the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Output Circuit High Voltage Test Status parameter displays Malfunction when commanding the EVAP Leak Detection Pump ON with a scan tool.
If Malfunction is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If Malfunction is displayed
8. Test or replace the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P2418-P2420: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP SWITCHING VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P2418
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Control Circuit
DTC P2419
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Control Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2420
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Control Circuit High Voltage
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
B+ |
P2400, P2419 |
P2400, P2418 |
- |
Control |
P2419 |
P2418 |
P2420 |
Circuit/System Description
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system uses an EVAP Leak Detection Pump to test for system leaks. The EVAP Leak Detection Pump assembly consists of the following components:
EVAP Leak Detection Pump with reference orifice
EVAP Leak Detection Pump pressure sensor
EVAP Leak Detection Pump switching valve
The engine control module (ECM) commands the EVAP leak detection pump switching valve to vent or not venting, pumping, position by a switch called a driver. The ECM monitors the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit. If they do not match it sets a DTC. The switching valve is located inside the EVAP leak detection pump and is non-serviceable.
Conditions for Running the DTC
The DTCs P2418, P2419 and P2420 run continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match for a minimum of 5 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P2418, P2419 and P2420 are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P2418, P2419 and P2420 are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
Where multiple DTCs set look for a common root cause like battery feeds, grounds, splices, etc.
Indeterminate state will display if the device is not in a commanded state. This is not to be considered a failure. Use the scan tool to exercise the device.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the parameters listed below do not display Malfunction when commanding the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve On and Off with a scan tool.
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Output Circuit High Voltage Test Status
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Output Circuit Open Test Status
EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Output Circuit Low Voltage Test Status
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If Malfunction is not displayed
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTCs do not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, test all components connected to this voltage circuit for a short and replace as necessary.
If the test lamp illuminates
3. Verify that a test lamp does not illuminate between the B+ circuit terminal 5 and the control circuit terminal 1.
If the test lamp illuminates
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
4. Remove the test lamp.
5. Verify the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Output Circuit High Voltage Test Status parameter displays OK when commanding the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve On with a scan tool.
If OK is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, vehicle ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If OK is displayed
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 1 and the B+ circuit terminal 5.
7. Verify the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Control Circuit High Voltage Test Status parameter is Malfunction when commanding the EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve On with a scan tool.
If Malfunction is not displayed
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If Malfunction is displayed
8. Test or replace the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P2422: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) VENT SOLENOID VALVE STUCK CLOSED
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P2422
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Vent Solenoid Valve Stuck Closed
Circuit/System Description
The EVAP vent solenoid valve controls fresh airflow into the EVAP canister. Battery voltage is supplied to the normally closed evaporative emission (EVAP) vent solenoid valve. The ECM commands the solenoid valve open (venting) or closed (not venting) by grounding the EVAP vent solenoid valve output circuit through an internal switch called a driver. The ECM monitors the EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor, gauge, to determine if a EVAP system pressure (vacuum) is near or above the reference pressure (vacuum) after a calibrated period of time. The ECM uses this reference to determine if the valve is stuck and sets the DTC when the vacuum exceeds a calibrated threshold.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P043E, P043, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0128, P012B, P012C, P012D, P145C, P145D, P145E, P0222, P0223, P0449, P0451 P0452, P0453, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P06E4, P0722, P0723, P1221, P1458, P1459, P145A, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2421, P2422, P2450, P2537, P2610, U0073, U0074, U0140, U182D is not set.
The EVAP purge valve is closed
The EVAP vent solenoid transitions from closed to open to closed
The EVAP leak detection pump switching valve in not venting, pump position
The EVAP leak detection pump is ON
The odometer greater than 15.9 km (9.9 mi)
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI)
The fuel level is between 10 - 90%
The engine coolant temperature less than 40°C (104°F)
The intake air temperature is between 4 - 45°C (39 - 113°F)
The system voltage greater than 10 V
The vehicle speed less than 4.8 km/h (3 MPH)
There is no key up during test
The refueling request button is not pressed
The service bay test is not active
The device control exceeds 0.5 s
There are three possible time windows for this test to run. Up to that point and through this time period the propulsion system must not be active. These time windows are: 6.0, 8.0 or 11.0 hours.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
Sufficient pressure or vacuum exist in the fuel tank system.
The fuel tank pressure sensor indicates a pressure greater than 0.697 kPa (0.1 PSI) or a vacuum less than
-0.697 kPa (-0.1 PSI) and the vent solenoid is commanded OPEN.
The change in the fuel tank pressure sensor reading is less than 1 kPa (0.15 PSI) after 10 s.
Or
No pressure or vacuum exists in the fuel tank system
The fuel tank pressure sensor indicates a pressure less than 0.697 kPa (0.1 PSI) or a vacuum greater than
-0.697 kPa (-0.1 PSI) and the vent solenoid is commanded OPEN
The EVAP leak detection pump is commanded ON
The 0.020" reference orifice vacuum measurement minus the EVAP leak detection pump sensor, gauge, vacuum reading is less than 0.3 kPa (0.04 PSI) after 5 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P2422 is a Type B DTCs. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P2422 is a Type B DTCs. Diagnostic Aids
A P0451 or P0497 can set with the Vehicle ON, the engine running and a stuck valve.
A P0451 or P2422 can set with the Vehicle in Service Mode and a stuck valve.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information Special Tools
CH 41415-30 Fuel Tank Cap Adapter
GE 41413-A Evaporative Emissions System Tester
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC P0449, P0498, or P0499 is not set
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to DTC P0449, P0498, or P0499.
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify the parameters listed below do not display Malfunction when commanding the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve On and Off with a scan tool.
EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Output Circuit High Voltage Test Status
EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Output Circuit Open Test Status
EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Output Circuit Low Voltage Test Status
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
If Malfunction is not displayed
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
6. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with the Circuit/System Testing.
1. Verify a blockage or restriction does not exist in the EVAP system components listed below.
Evaporative Emission Vent System Hoses
Evaporative Emission Canister
Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
Evaporative Emission Vent Filter
If a condition exists
Repair or replace the component as necessary
If none of the conditions exist
2. Reconnect all previously disconnected EVAP hardware.
NOTE: Refer to the GE 41413-A operation manual for detailed instructions in Evaporative Emission Control System Diagnosis.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap and connect the CH 41415-30 to the fuel tank filler neck. Connect the GE 41413-A to the CH 41415-30 .
4. Command the EVAP Test function with a scan tool to seal the EVAP system.
5. Turn the nitrogen/smoke valve on the GE 41413-A to nitrogen.
NOTE: DO NOT exceed the specified value in this step. Exceeding the specified value may produce incorrect test results.
6. Use the remote switch to activate the GE 41413-A and pressurize the fuel tank to 5.0 in H2O (1.24 kPa).
7. Verify the scan tool Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor parameter is 0 in H2O (0 kPa) when commanding the EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve to ON.
If not 0 in H2O
Test for a blockage or a restriction in the EVAP vent hose or inlet. If the inlet or hose test normal, replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
If 0 in H2O
8. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
If the DTC sets
Refer to step 1 above.
If the DTC does not set
9. All OK.
Component Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
2. Test for 25.0-30.0 Ω between the control terminal 1 and the B+ voltage terminal 2.
If not within the specified range
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
If within the specified range
3. Verify there is no air flow through the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve by applying vacuum to the pump side of the valve. It should hold 1-2 in. Hg (3-7 kPa) for 30 s.
If not within the specified range
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
If within the specified range
4. Reconnect the harness connector at the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve.
5. Command the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve ON with a scan tool.
6. Apply vacuum to the pump side of the valve. It should not hold vacuum
If not within the specified range
Replace the Q13 Evaporative Emission Vent Solenoid Valve
If within the specified range
7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid Valve Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, setup, and programming
DTC P2450: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP SWITCHING VALVE PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P2450
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Performance
Circuit/System Description
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system uses a EVAP leak detection pump to test for system leaks. The EVAP leak detection pump assembly consists of the following components:
EVAP leak detection pump with reference orifice
EVAP leak detection pump switching valve
EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor
When the EVAP leak detection vacuum pump is ON, and the EVAP leak detection pump switching valve transitions from vent to not venting, pump, position, there should be an initial vacuum drop followed by a vacuum increase on a good system. The diagnostic looks for a difference relative to the reference vacuum, either an increase or decrease. No vacuum change indicates a problem with the EVAP leak detection pump switching valve and a P2450 is set. The switching valve is integral to the EVAP leak detection pump assembly and is non serviceable.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTCs P043E, P043F, P0451, P1458, P145C, P145D, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0128, P012B, P012C, P012D, P0222, P0223, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P06E4, P0722, P0723, P1221, P1459, P145A, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2537, P2610, U0073, U0074, U0140, U182D and P2422 is not set.
The purge solenoid valve is closed.
The vent solenoid valve is closed.
The vehicle is OFF.
The refueling request button pressed.
A service bay test is not active.
The EVAP leak detection pump switching valve transitions from vent to not venting, pump position.
The EVAP leak detection vacuum pump is ON.
The odometer greater than 16 km (10 mi).
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The fuel level is between 10 - 90%.
The engine coolant temperature is less than 40°C (104°F).
The intake air temperature is between 4 - 45°C (39 - 113°F).
The system voltage is greater than 10 V.
The vehicle speed less than 4.8 km/h (3 MPH).
There are three possible time windows for this test to run. Up to that point, and through this time period, the propulsion system must not be active. These time windows are: 5.0, 8.0 or 11.0 h.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The EVAP leak detection pump is commanded ON, and the EVAP leak detection pump switching valve transitions from vent to not venting, pump, position. If all conditions are not met after 5 s, then the EVAP leak detection pump switching value is stuck and the P2450 sets.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P2450 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P2450 is a Type B DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve parameter does not display Malfunction when commanded to Venting or Not Venting.
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If Malfunction is not displayed
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Ensure that the vehicle underbody temperature is similar to the ambient temperature and allow the surrounding air to stabilize before starting the diagnostic procedure.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the following scan tool parameters when commanding the EVAP Test ON.
The EVAP Leak Detection Pump Command should show ON.
The EVAP Leak Detection Pump Switching Valve Command should change from Venting to Not Venting.
If not within specified range
Replace the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly
If within specified range
3. Verify and record the EVAP leak detection pump pressure and fuel tank pressure. Both pressures should drop
If status changes, but no pressure drop
4. Remove the vent pipe and the fresh air pipe from the EVAP leak detection pump assembly
5. Verify the pump openings for any of the conditions listed below
The EVAP leak detection pump to the vent solenoid tube and clamps for damage or restriction
Missing or damaged EVAP leak detection pump O-rings
The fresh air tube near the fuel fill pocket for a restriction
The fresh air tube for a restriction
Repair or replace any of the above components.
If all components test normal
Replace the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P2457: EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) COOLER LOW EFFICIENCY
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P2457
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Cooler Low Efficiency
Circuit/System Description
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) cooler has internal coolant passages and metal fins between the passages to help carry away excessive exhaust gas heat. Engine coolant flowing through the EGR cooler helps cool the exhaust gases flowing to the EGR valve. The EGR cooler must remain within a specific temperature range to efficiently reduce emissions. The engine control module (ECM) determines the efficiency of the EGR cooler by monitoring both EGR temperature sensors while the EGR valve is active.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC P0117, P0118, P011B, P01F0, P0128, P0403, P040C, P040D, P040F, P041C, P041D, P046C, P245A, P245B, P245C, P24A5, or P2228 is not set.
Battery voltage is greater than 11 V.
Engine speed is between 1,000 - 4,000 RPM.
Ambient temperature is greater than -7°C (19°F).
Up stream exhaust gas temperature is between 200 - 370°C (392 - 698°F).
Barometric pressure (BARO) is greater than 70 kPa (10 psi).
DTC P2457 runs continuously when the above conditions are met for at least 80 s.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The ECM detects that the ratio of the downstream EGR cooler temperature and the upstream EGR cooler temperature is not within a calibrated range.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTC P2457 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the MIL/DTC DTC P2457 is a Type B DTC. Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify only DTC P2457 is set.
If any other DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If no other DTCs are set
3. Verify none of the conditions listed below exist:
Low engine coolant level.
Damaged, restricted, or leaking radiator, coolant pipes or hoses.
Contaminated engine coolant.
Damaged, restricted or leaking EGR cooler or cooler pipes/hoses.
If any of the conditions exist
Repair or replace the component as necessary.
If none of the conditions exist
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
5. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
6. Clean or replace the EGR cooler.
If the DTC does not set
7. All OK
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Replacement
Refer to
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler Replacement
DTC P24B9-P24BB: EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTION PUMP PRESSURE SENSOR
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC P24B9
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Pressure Sensor Performance
DTC P24BA
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P24BB
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detection Pump Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Circuit/System Description
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system uses a EVAP leak detection pump to test for system leaks. The EVAP leak detection pump assembly consists of three main components:
EVAP leak detection pump with reference orifice
EVAP leak detection pump switching valve
EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor
The EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor performs a correlation to barometric pressure (BARO). After a short delay period, the EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor, absolute, reading is compared to the BARO. Large deviations will increment the fail counter threshold and sets a P24B9.
There are two different threshold calibrations used in the comparison to the BARO. A smaller threshold is used
when there has been a recent BARO update and then a larger threshold value is used when there has not been a recent BARO update.
Conditions for Running the DTC
P24B9 - Condition 1:
DTCs P043E, P043F, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0119, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0128, P24BB, P145C, P145D, P145E, P145F, P012B, P012C, P012D, P0222, P0223, P0443, P0449, P0451, P0452, P0453, P0458, P0459, P0461, P0462, P0463, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P06E4, P0722, P0723, P1221, P24B9, P24BA, P2066, P2067, P2068, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2421, P2422, P2450, P2537, P2610, U0073,
U0074, U0140, U182D is not set.
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between than 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The fuel level is between 10 - 90%.
The propulsion system is not active.
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) is less than 40°C (104°F).
The intake air temperature (IAT) is between 4 - 45°C (39 - 113°F).
The battery voltage is greater than 10 V.
Vehicle speed is less than 1.6 km/h (1 MPH).
No Vehicle ON during this test.
No refueling request button is pressed.
A service bay test is not active.
The device control exceeds 0.5 s
There are three possible time windows for this test to run. Up to that point and through this time period the propulsion system must not be active. These time windows are: 5.0, 7.0 or 9.5 h.
P24B9 - Condition 2:
DTCs P0068, P0071, P0072, P0073, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P010C, P010D, P0111, P0112, P0113, P0114, P0121, P0122, P0123, P012B, P012C, P012D, P0222, P0223, P0442, P0443, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0458, P0459, P0498, P0499, P0502, P0503, P0606, P0722, P0723, P16F3, P1104, P1221, P24B9, P24BA, P24BB, P145D, P145E, P2100, P2101, P2102, P2103, P2400, P2401, P2402, P2418, P2419, P2420, P2422, P2450 is not set.
The barometric pressure (BARO) is between 70 - 110 kPa (10 - 16 PSI).
The outside air temperature is between 4 - 35°C (39 - 102°F).
The propulsion system is active and the engine is running.
The system voltage is greater than 11 V.
The purge is not enabled.
A refueling request button is not pressed.
The device control exceeds 0.5 s.
The fuel tank pressure sensor performance diagnostic P0451 is running.
The EVAP system no purge flow diagnostic P0497 is running.
P24BA and P24BB
Runs any time the engine control module (ECM) is awake and the propulsion system is active or not active.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P24B9
When the propulsion system is not active - If the difference between the EVAP system leak detection pump pressure sensor, absolute reading and the BARO value is 3 kPa (0.44 PSI) for 14 s.
When the propulsion system is active, and after a stabilization time of 10 s - When a recent BARO update has occurred within the last 0.1 km (0.06 mi), if the difference between the EVAP system leak detection pump pressure sensor, absolute, reading and the BARO value from the MAP sensor is 15 kPa (2.17 PSI).
When a recent BARO update has not occurred within the last 0.1 km (0.06 mi) - If the difference between the EVAP system leak detection pump pressure sensor, absolute, reading and the BARO value from the MAP sensor is 20 kPa (2.9 PSI).
P24BA
The ECM detects that the EVAP system leak detection pump pressure sensor signal is less than 0.7 V for greater than 8 s.
P24BB
The ECM detects that the EVAP system leak detection pump pressure sensor signal is greater than 4.85 V for greater than 8 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs P24B9, P24BA and P24BB are Type B DTCs.
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs P24B9, P24BA and P24BB are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
A normal BARO reading of the vehicle's geographic location will help to determine if a BARO sensor is significantly off its reading.
The diagnostic does not run when purge is enabled because it can influence the EVAP leak detection pump pressure sensor reading if there is any restriction in the fresh air plumbing.
Test for a plugged 5 micron in-line vent filter between the EVAP system leak detection pump and the fuel fill neck.
This diagnostic is disabled when P0451 or P0497 is currently running.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Powertrain Component View
Powertrain Component Views
Description and Operation
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify the BARO reading against the EVAP leak detection pump sensor reading with a scan tool. Compare this to the Altitude vs. Barometric Pressure Table referenced here Altitude Versus Barometric Pressure
A variance of greater than 3 kPa (0.44 PSI)
Indicates a skewed BARO or EVAP leak detection pump sensor. Refer to: DTC P2227-P2230
A variance of less than 3 kPa (0.44 PSI)
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
4. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
5. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
NOTE: Test steps 2 - 6 are performed on the ECM side of the harness connector.
2. Vehicle OFF, all systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
3. Test for less than 5 Ω of resistance between the low reference circuit terminal 8 and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 5 Ω
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 6 and ground.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 5 V reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 5.2 V
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 5 V reference circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If between 4.8 - 5.2 V
6. Verify the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, Vehicle in Service Mode
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 7 and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 0.2 V
7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 7 and the 5 V reference circuit terminal 6.
8. Verify the scan tool EVAP Leak Detection Pump Pressure parameter is greater than 4.7 V.
If 4.7 V or less
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 7 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit
If infinite resistance
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 4.7 V
9. Remove the EVAP assembly.
10. Verify none of the conditions listed below exist:
Poor connections at the X350 or X351 harness connectors
Open or shorted 5 V reference circuit
Open or shorted sensor signal circuit
Open low reference circuit
If a condition exists
Repair as necessary.
If no conditions exist
11. Test or replace the Q63 Evaporative Emission System Leak Detection Pump Assembly.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Evaporative Emission System Vacuum Leak Detection Pump Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for ECM replacement, programming and setup.
DTC P2618: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT CIRCUIT LOW/HIGH VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure:
Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:
Strategy Based Diagnosis
An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here:
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
DTC P2618
Crankshaft Position Signal Output Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2619
Crankshaft Position Signal Output Circuit High Voltage
Conditions for Running the DTC
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 11 V
Ignition = On
Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit = Active
Frequency the DTC runs = Continuously - After the running conditions are met
Conditions for Setting the DTC
P2618
Crankshaft Position Signal Output Circuit = Short to Ground or Open - For greater than 5 s
P2619
Crankshaft Position Signal Output Circuit = Short to Voltage - For greater than 5 s
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
DTCs listed in the DTC Descriptor Category = Type C DTC
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
DTCs listed in the DTC Descriptor Category = Type C DTC
Reference Information
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Circuit/System Verification
1. Engine - Running
2. Verify there are no DTCs/symptoms related to the following system/component, if equipped:
K71 Transmission Control Module
K103 Fuel Injector Control Module
T3 Audio Amplifier
T6 Power Inverter Module
If a DTC or symptom exists
Refer to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
Symptoms - Vehicle
If no DTC or symptom exists
3. All OK.
DTC P2635: FUEL PUMP FLOW PERFORMANCE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC P2635
Fuel Pump Flow Performance
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump driver control module when the ECM detects that the ignition is on. The voltage from the ECM to the fuel pump driver control module remains active for 2 seconds, unless the engine is in crank or run. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump driver control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump. The fuel pump driver control module maintains correct fuel pressure based on the information from the fuel pressure sensor and varying the pulse width modulated controlled current to the fuel pump.
Conditions for Running the DTC
DTC P018B, P018C, P018D, P0231, P0232, P023F, P0641, or P1255 are not active.
Fuel pump control is enabled and the fuel pump control state is normal.
The ignition voltage is between 11 - 32 V.
The engine has been running for greater than or equal to 30 seconds.
The engine fuel flow is not 0.
Low fuel level warning not present.
The DTC runs continuously when the above conditions are met.
Conditions for Setting the DTC
The fuel pump driver control module detects a difference of ± 60 kPa at 400 kPa request or ±45 kPa at 300 kPa request between the desired fuel pressure and the actual fuel pressure for approximately 10 s.
Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P2635 is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P2635 is a Type B DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
Using the Failure Records data may help locate an intermittent condition. If you cannot duplicate the DTC, the information in the Failure Records can help determine how many miles since the DTC set. The Fail Counter and Pass Counter can help determine how many ignition cycles that the diagnostic test reported a pass and/or a fail.
On vehicles equipped with a high pressure mechanical pump on Direct Fuel Injection engines, the vehicle may continue to run even though the pump in the fuel tank is not operating.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
1. Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Verify DTC U0074 or U18A2 is not set or stored in history.
If DTC U0074 or U18A2 is set or stored in history
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If DTC U0074 or U18A2 is not set or stored in history
3. Verify that DTC P018B, P018C, P018D, P0231, P0232, or P023F is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If none of the DTCs are set
4. Verify the scan tool Short Term Fuel Pump Trim and the Long Term Fuel Pump Trim when multiplied together are less than 1.5.
If greater than 1.5
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If less than 1.5
5. Command the fuel pressure to 300 kPa (43.5 psi) using the scan tool Control Function: Fuel Pressure Increase/Decrease.
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Fuel Pressure Sensor & Desired Fuel Pressure are within 45 kPa (6.5 psi) of each other at 300 kPa (43.5 psi) request.
If greater than 45 kPa (6.5 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If less than 45 kPa (6.5 psi)
7. Command the Fuel Pressure to 400 kPa (58 psi) using the scan tool Control Function: Fuel Pressure Increase/Decrease.
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Fuel Pressure Sensor & Desired Fuel Pressure are within 60 kPa (8.7 psi) of each other at 400 kPa (58 psi) request.
If greater than 60 kPa (8.7 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If less than 60 kPa (8.7 psi)
9. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
10. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the DTC does not set
11. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Do not replace the fuel pump driver control module based on a history DTC P2635. DTC P2635 may be stored but that does not indicate a failure of the fuel pump driver control module. Refer to Strategy Based Diagnosis for further history DTC diagnostics.
1. Verify the proper fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
If the fuel pressure is not normal
Repair the fuel system as necessary.
If the fuel pressure is normal
2. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Injector Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Pump Fuel Feed Hose Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement
Perform the Fuel Pump Trim Reset procedure with a scan tool after the repair.
Repair Verification
1. Install any components that have been removed or replaced during diagnosis.
2. Perform any adjustments, programming or setup procedures that are required when a component is removed or replaced.
3. Clear the DTCs with a scan tool.
4. Turn OFF the ignition for 60 s.
5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC.
6. Verify the scan tool Short Term Fuel Pump Trim and the Long Term Fuel Pump Trim when multiplied together are less than 1.5.
If greater than 1.5
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If less than 1.5
7. Command the Fuel Pressure to 300 kPa (43.5 psi) using the scan tool Control Function: Fuel Pressure Increase/Decrease.
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Fuel Pressure Sensor & Desired Fuel Pressure are within 45 kPa (6.5 psi) of each other at 300 kPa (43.5 psi) request.
If greater than 45 kPa (6.5 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If less than 45 kPa (6.5 psi)
9. Command the Fuel Pressure to 400 kPa (58 psi) using the scan tool Control Function: Fuel Pressure Increase/Decrease.
10. Verify the scan tool parameter: Fuel Pressure Sensor & Desired Fuel Pressure are within 60 kPa (8.7 psi) of each other at 400 kPa (58 psi) request.
If greater than 60 kPa (8.7 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If less than 60 kPa (8.7 psi)
11. All OK.
SYMPTOMS - ENGINE CONTROLS
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Symptoms Description
Symptoms cover conditions that are not covered by DTCs. Certain conditions can cause multiple symptoms. These conditions are listed together under Symptoms Testing. Conditions that may only cause specific symptoms are listed separately under Additional Symptoms Tests.
However, symptoms which affect the internal combustion engine (ICE) of a typical gas powered vehicle may not be noticeable on the Volt ICE. For the Volt ICE, symptoms such as, hesitation, sag, stumble, sluggishness, surging, and even engine stalling, are buffered by the Voltec propulsion system, which is designed to smooth out ICE irregularities. Even when the battery pack is depleted and the ICE is forced to run in order to sustain the charge, the battery pack should still have enough retained power to perform this buffering function. Refer to Hybrid Modes of Operation Description for more information.
Perform the symptoms testing before using the additional symptoms testing.
Symptoms Definition
Backfire
Fuel ignites in the intake manifold or in the exhaust system, making a loud popping noise.
Cuts Out, Misses
A steady pulsation or jerking that follows engine speed. The exhaust has a steady spitting sound.
Detonation/Spark Knock
A mild to severe ping which usually gets worse while under load. The engine makes sharp metallic knocks that change with throttle opening.
Dieseling, Run-On
The engine continues to run after the vehicle is turned OFF.
Engine Control Module (ECM) Commanded Reduced Engine Power
The ECM illuminates the Reduced Engine Power lamp and will limit engine power under potential engine damaging or emissions related conditions. A DTC may be not be set.
Fuel Odor
A noticeable smell of unburned fuel.
Hard Start
Engine does not start for a long time. The engine does eventually run, or may start but immediately stall.
Poor Fuel Economy
Fuel economy, as measured by an actual road test, is noticeably lower than expected. Also, the fuel economy is noticeably lower than it was on this vehicle at one time, as previously shown by an actual road test.
Rough, Unstable Idle and/or Stalling
The engine runs unevenly. If severe, the engine or the vehicle may shake and the engine may stall.
Symptoms Verification
Before using the Symptom tables, perform the following inspections
Verify the engine control module (ECM) and the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) are operating correctly.
Verify there are no DTCs stored.
Verify the scan tool data is within the normal operating range.
Verify there are no Bulletins available for the current symptom.
Verify the vehicle tires are correctly inflated and meet original equipment specifications.
Verify the Hybrid/EV Battery Pack state of charge. A low state of charge will force the engine to idle at a higher RPM. Refer to
Plug-In Charging System Description and Operation
.
Perform the Visual/Physical Inspection in this section. The visual/physical inspection is extremely important, and can lead to correcting a condition without additional testing. It may also help to reveal the cause of an intermittent condition.
Identifying Intermittent Conditions
Many intermittent conditions occur with harness or connector movement due to engine torque, rough pavement, vibration or physical movements of a component. Refer to the following for a list of issues that may cause an intermittent condition:
Moisture and water intrusion in connectors, terminals, and components
Incomplete connector mating
Poor terminal contact
High circuit or component resistance - High resistance can include any resistance, regardless of the amount, which can interrupt the operation of the component.
Harness that is too short or tight
Wire insulation that is chaffed or cut
High or low ambient temperature
High or low engine coolant temperature
High underhood temperature
Excessive heat in a component or in a circuit due to circuit resistance, poor terminal contact, or high electrical load
High or low system voltage
High vehicle load conditions
Rough road surfaces
Electro-magnetic interference (EMI)/circuit interference from relays, solenoids or other electrical surge
Incorrect installation of aftermarket, add on accessories
Visual/Physical Check
Verify that the control module grounds are clean, tight, and correctly located.
Verify that the vacuum hoses are not split or kinked, and are properly routed and connected.
Verify that the air filter is clean and free from restrictions.
Verify that there is no water intrusion in connectors, terminals, and components.
Inspect the air intake ducts for the conditions listed below:
Collapsed
Damaged areas
Looseness
Incorrect installation
Leaking
If any condition listed above has allowed non-metered air to enter the air induction system, the Q38 THROTTLE BODY: THROTTLE/IDLE LEARN procedure must be performed after the repair is complete.
Inspect for air leaks at the throttle body mounting area, the mass air flow (MAF) sensor and intake manifold sealing surfaces.
Inspect the wiring harness for the following conditions:
Poor connections
Pinches
Cuts
Inspect for loose, damaged, unseated, or missing sensors/components.
Inspect the terminals for corrosion and correct contact.
Symptoms Testing
Backfire, Cuts-Out, Misses, Detonation/Spark Knock, Dieseling/Run-On, ECM Commanded Reduced Engine Power, Fuel Odor, Hard Start, Poor Fuel Economy, or Rough, Unstable, or Incorrect Idle and Stalling.
Test/inspect the fuel system for the conditions listed below:
Incorrect system operation or fuel pressure. Refer to
Fuel System Diagnosis
.
Contaminated or poor quality fuel. Refer to
Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis
.
Test/inspect the ignition system for the conditions listed below:
NOTE: Observe the scan tool Cylinder 1 - 4 Current Misfire Counters and the Ignition Coil Control Circuit Status parameters to help isolate an ignition system condition.
Spark plugs with incorrect heat range, coolant or oil fouling, or an abnormal condition. Refer to
Spark Plug Inspection , and Spark Plug Replacement .
Secondary ignition system component susceptible to moisture. Wet down the secondary ignition system with water from a spray bottle. This may help locate damaged or deteriorated ignition system components. Look/listen for arcing or misfiring as the water is applied.
Weak spark. Use the
J-26792
HEI Spark Tester for testing and refer to
Electronic Ignition System
Diagnosis
. For equivalent regional tools, refer to
Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools
(Repair Tools)
.
Test/inspect for the conditions listed below:
Non-metered air flow into the air induction system. If a leak is found, repair as necessary. The Q38 THROTTLE BODY: THROTTLE/IDLE LEARN procedure must be performed when the repair is complete.
Items that can cause an engine to run lean or rich. Refer to
DTC P0171 or P0172
for additional information.
An intermittent crankshaft position sensor condition. Observe the scan tool Crankshaft Position Resync Counter parameter. The Resync Counter parameter should remain at 0 during all operating conditions, and when moving the related harnesses and connectors between the crankshaft position sensor and the ECM.
Excessive knock sensor system spark retard activity. Observe the scan tool Knock Retard parameter for activity greater than 0° and refer to
DTC P0324, P0326, or P06B6
, and
DTC P0325, P0327,
or P0328
for further diagnosis.
Electromagnetic interference on the reference circuit, which can cause a misfire condition. You can usually detect electromagnetic interference with a scan tool by monitoring the engine speed parameter. A sudden increase in the engine speed parameter with little change in actual engine speed may be an indication that electromagnetic interference is present. Inspect the high voltage components near the ignition control circuit if a condition exists.
A heated oxygen sensors (HO2S) that is contaminated from fuel, silicon, or from the incorrect use of RTV sealant. The sensors may have a white powdery coating resulting in a high, but false, signal voltage, which gives a rich exhaust indication.
A leaking or restricted positive crankcase ventilation system.
Inspect the exhaust system components for the conditions listed below:
Physical damage or possible internal malfunction.
Restricted 3-way catalysts.
For additional information, refer to Symptoms - Engine Exhaust
Inspect the engine cooling system for the conditions listed below:
A thermostat with incorrect heat range. Refer to
Thermostat Diagnosis
.
Incorrectly operating engine cooling fans. Refer to DTC P1485-P1487
.
Incorrectly operating engine coolant thermostat heater. Refer to
DTC P0597-P0599
.
Low engine coolant level. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling
.
For additional information, refer to Symptoms - Engine Cooling .
Inspect the engine for the mechanical conditions listed below:
Excessive oil in the combustion chamber or leaking valve seals
Incorrect cylinder compression
Sticking or leaking valves
Worn camshaft lobes
Incorrect valve timing
Broken valve springs
Excessive carbon buildup in the combustion chambers. Clean the chambers with Top Engine Cleaner, if necessary. Follow the instructions on the can.
Incorrect engine parts
For additional information, refer to Symptoms - Engine Mechanical
If the above conditions do not address the symptom, refer to the additional symptoms tests.
Additional Symptoms Tests
Detonation/Spark Knock
Test the engine for an overheating condition. Refer to
Engine Overheating
.
Inspect for excessive carbon buildup in the combustion chambers. Clean the chambers with Top Engine Cleaner, if necessary. Follow the instructions on the can.
ECM Commanded Reduced Engine Power
Under certain conditions the ECM may limit engine power by reducing engine torque and, for some vehicles, fuel pressure as well. For most, but not all of the conditions, the ECM will illuminate the reduced engine power lamp on the instrument panel cluster, however a DTC may not be set.
A repair may not be necessary. Observe the scan tool Reduced Engine Power History parameter or refer to K20 Engine Control Module: Scan Tool Information to determine the reason for the reduced engine power.
Verify or inspect for the following:
Vehicle being driven inappropriately. Towing heavy loads up an incline for an extended period of time or operating the vehicle at sustained, excessively high engine speeds may cause the engine oil or coolant to overheat. Inspect the airflow passageways in front of the engine for obstructions and clear away any debris or foreign material that is found. If no obstructions are found, review approved driving habits with the customer. The customer may need to operate the vehicle at a higher engine speed to improve cooling
system performance, or, at a slower engine speed to reduce engine load.
If the vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® feature, reduced engine power may be due to OnStar® remote command. Verify the vehicle is not in the OnStar® initiated Stolen Vehicle Slowdown mode.
A cooling system condition which may cause the engine coolant to overheat. Refer to
Hybrid/EV
Cooling System Description and Operation
to verify correct operation of the cooling system.
High pressure fuel system condition. Refer to
Fuel System Diagnosis, and Fuel System Description
to verify high pressure fuel system operation.
Intake air temperature too high. Engine running, observe the scan tool IAT Sensor parameter. The readings should be between -40°C and +149°C (-40°F and +300°F). Refer to
DTC P0112, P0113,
or P0114
for additional information
Fuel temperature too high.
A hybrid/EV propulsion system malfunction. Inspect for the following conditions:
Hybrid/EV battery pack charge too low. Review the scan tool Hybrid/EV Battery Pack Charge Remaining parameter for a Battery Power Low condition.
Drive motor or inverter temperature too high.
Engine powered Hybrid/EV battery charging unavailable. The Internal combustion engine (ICE) may be unable to charge the Hybrid/EV battery. Refer to the conditions listed below for a possible cause:
ICE has been run out of fuel. Review the scan tool Remaining Fuel in Tank parameter to verify that the engine has an adequate supply of fuel in the fuel tank.
Any ICE performance malfunction, such as an incorrectly operating ignition or fuel system.
Review the appropriate scan tool parameters to help diagnose the condition.
A Hybrid/EV drive motor 1 (A) or 2 (B) malfunction.
An incorrectly operating transmission clutch.
An incorrectly operating transmission fluid pump. Inspect for the following conditions:
Incorrect transmission fluid level
Plugged or restricted transmission fluid coolers or pipes
For additional information, refer to
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
.
Fuel Odor
Inspect for leaking, damaged, or deteriorated fuel lines.
Inspect for a Saturated EVAP canister. Refer to
Evaporative Emission Control System Description
.
Inspect for a condition with the internal components of the fuel tank assembly. Refer to Fuel System
Description .
Hard Start
Observe the Throttle Body Idle Airflow Compensation parameter with a scan tool. A value greater than 90% may indicate an excessive accumulation of deposits in the throttle bore. Inspect the throttle body and bore and clean, if necessary. Refer to
Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning
.
Test the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor. Compare the ECT sensor value to the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor value on a cold engine. The ECT and IAT sensor values should be within
approximately 3°C (5°F). If the ECT sensor is out of range with the IAT sensor, test the resistance of the ECT sensor. Refer to Temperature Versus Resistance (Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor) for resistance specifications. Replace the ECT sensor if the resistance is not within specification. If the sensor is within the specification, test the ECT circuits for a high resistance.
Test the fuel pump operation. The fuel pump should turn ON for 2 s when attempting to start the engine.
Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
Poor Fuel Economy
Inspect for heavy loads being carried or towed.
Observe the Throttle Body Idle Airflow Compensation parameter with a scan tool. A value greater than 90% may indicate an excessive accumulation of deposits in the throttle bore. Inspect the throttle body and bore and clean, if necessary. Refer to
Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning
.
Rough, Unstable Idle and/or Stalling
Engine idle speed may be unstable or the engine may stall if the ECM has learned an incorrect idle/airflow compensation value. A DTC may also set. Observe the scan tool Throttle Body Idle Airflow Compensation parameter. A value greater than 90% may indicate an excessive accumulation of deposits in the throttle bore. If the throttle body needs cleaning, refer to
Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning
.
The actions listed below may also cause the ECM to learn an incorrect idle value.
The engine control module has been replaced
The throttle body has been replaced
The throttle body has been cleaned but the idle learn procedure was not performed after completing the cleaning
The air induction system was leaking, allowing non-metered air to enter the combustion chamber.
The leak was repaired but the idle learn procedure was not performed after repairing the leak
If any of the actions listed above have occurred, the Q38 THROTTLE BODY: THROTTLE/IDLE LEARN procedure must be performed.
Inspect the engine mounts for looseness, wear, and damage.
ENGINE CRANKS BUT DOES NOT RUN
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine cranks but does not run is an organized approach to identify a condition which prevents the engine from starting. This diagnostic directs the technician to the appropriate system diagnosis.
Diagnostic Aids
When the engine is started, it is cranked by the 300 V drive motor/generator, which can rotate the engine to operating speed within just a few hundred milliseconds. However, it may be difficult to determine the running state of the engine. Observe the scan tool ICE Status parameter to determine the running state of the engine. The parameter will display one of the following values:
Engine Stalled
Invalid
OFF
Running
Silent Start
Stop
Start
Some failure conditions can make the engine appear to start, run briefly, then stall, which results in the following two DIC messages being displayed:
Engine Not Available, Service Vehicle Soon
Propulsion Power Reduced
Inspect the engine for good secure electrical grounds.
Insufficient fuel can prevent the engine from starting. Thoroughly inspect the fuel delivery system for sufficient fuel volume to the fuel injectors. Inspect the fuel supply components for partial blockage or restrictions.
Fuel injectors with partially blocked and restricted nozzles, or a malfunctioning solenoid, can prevent the engine from starting.
There may be fuel spray at the fuel injectors and the indicated fuel pressure may be correct, yet there may not be enough fuel for combustion to take place. If the fuel injectors and the injector circuit are OK, and fuel spray is detected, the fuel injector ON time may be inadequate. If the engine control module (ECM) receives incorrect inputs from the various information sensors, the fuel delivered by the fuel injectors may be inadequate for the engine to start. Check all the engine data parameters with a scan tool and compare the values indicated with the expected values or the values from a known vehicle in good condition.
Inspect the engine for good secure electrical grounds.
Water or foreign material in the fuel can prevent the engine from starting. During freezing weather, the water can freeze inside the fuel system. After 30 min in a heated repair shop, the water may melt and allow the engine to start. The malfunction may not recur until parked overnight in freezing temperatures.
Under extreme weather conditions, or over a period of time, the ignition system may become susceptible to moisture. This condition may become serious enough to prevent the engine from starting. Bring the vehicle into a dry, heated garage and allow it to dry out for several hours. If the engine then starts, inspect for an ignition system that is susceptible to moisture.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information. Special Tools
CH-48027
Digital Pressure Gauge
J 26792
HEI Spark Tester
J 34730-2C
Injector Tester
J 36012-A
Ignition System Diagnostic Harness
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: This diagnostic assumes the following:
The battery is completely charged. See Battery Inspection/Test .
There is adequate fuel in the fuel tank.
1. Attempt to start the engine while observing the DTC information with a scan tool.
2. Verify that DTC P0117, P0118, P018B, P018C, P018D, P0119, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P0231, P0232, P023F, P025A, P0335, P0336, P0513, P0562, P0563, P0601, P0602, P0603, P0604, P0606, P062F, P0628, P0629, P0633, P0641, P064A, P0685, P0689, P0690, P06A6, P1255, P1516, P1631, P1682, P16F3, P2101, P2119, P2135, P2176, P2610 or P2635 is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If none of the DTCs are set
3. Verify the scan tool Engine Speed parameter displays greater than 0 RPM while attempting to start the engine.
If 0 RPM
Refer to DTC P0335 or P0336 .
If greater than 0 RPM
4. Vehicle in Service Mode, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON several times with a scan tool.
5. Verify the scan tool circuit parameters listed below do not display Malfunction:
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit High Voltage Test Status
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Open Test Status
Fuel Pump Enable Circuit Low Voltage Test Status
If Malfunction is displayed
Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
If Malfunction is not displayed
6. Vehicle OFF, install the CH-48027 digital pressure gauge.
NOTE:
If the engine is too hot, high fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. Allow the engine coolant temperature to cool to less than 60°C (150°F) before attempting to record fuel pressure.
The fuel pump may need to be commanded ON a few times, in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure.
Do NOT start the engine for this test.
7. Vehicle in Service Mode, command the Fuel Pump Enable ON several times with a scan tool.
Verify the fuel pressure is between 379 - 427 kPa (55 - 62 PSI) with the fuel pump running.
If not within the specified range
Refer to Fuel System Diagnosis.
If within the specified range
8. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at a Q17 Fuel Injector.
9. Connect the J 34730-2C injector tester to the fuel injector harness connector.
10. Verify the injector tester flashes or illuminates while attempting to start the engine.
If the injector tester does not flash or illuminate
Refer to DTC P0201-P0204, P0261, P0262, P0264, P0265, P0267, P0268, P0270, P0271, P1248, P1249, P124A, P124B, P2147, P2148, P2150, P2151, P2153, P2154, P2156, or P2157 .
If the injector tester flashes or illuminates
NOTE: It may be necessary to secure the J 36012-A ignition system diagnostic harness to the spark plug boots with electrical tape.
11. Install the J 36012-A ignition system diagnostic harness to the spark plug boots.
12. Connect the J 26792 HEI spark tester between the boot of a spark plug wire and ground.
13. Connect the remaining wires to the appropriate cylinders.
NOTE:
Perform the spark test on at least 3 of the 4 cylinders.
An erratic or weak spark is considered a no spark condition.
14. Verify the spark tester sparks while attempting to start the engine.
If the spark tester does not spark
Refer to Electronic Ignition System Diagnosis.
If the spark tester sparks
15. Verify none of the conditions listed below exist:
Air intake duct to the throttle body collapsed
Air filter and air intake system restricted/obstructed
Spark plugs gas or coolant fouled
Skewed manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Skewed engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
Restricted exhaust system. Refer to
Restricted Exhaust
.
Fuel contamination. Refer to
Alcohol/Contaminants-in-Fuel Diagnosis
.
Engine mechanical condition, for example, worn timing chain or low compression. Refer to
Symptoms - Engine Mechanical .
If a condition exists
Repair as necessary.
If no conditions exist
16. All OK.
Repair Verification
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Ignition Coil Replacement
Refer to
Spark Plug Replacement
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) illuminates to inform the driver that an emission system fault has
occurred and the powertrain control system requires service. Ignition voltage is supplied directly to the MIL. The engine control module (ECM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit when the emission system fault occurs. Under normal operating conditions, the MIL should be ON only when the vehicle is ON and the engine is OFF.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Instrument Cluster Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Engine Control Module Description
Hybrid Modes of Operation Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Any MIL requesting DTCs that may be set should be diagnosed first.
1. Vehicle Running.
2. Verify the Malfunction Indicator Lamp turns ON and OFF while commanding the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) On and Off with a scan tool.
If the MIL does not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the MIL turns ON and OFF
3. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster.
2. Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition voltage circuit terminal 8 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ignition voltage circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect all components on the circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition voltage circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If infinite resistance, test all components connected to the ignition voltage circuit and replace as necessary.
If the test lamp illuminates
4. Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to Control Module References for instrument panel cluster replacement, programming, and setup.
FUEL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to the fuel pump driver control module when power up is commanded. The voltage signal from the ECM to the fuel pump driver control module remains active for 2 s, unless the vehicle is ON or the vehicle is in Service Mode. While this voltage is being received, the fuel pump driver control module closes the ground switch of the fuel pump and also supplies a varying voltage to the fuel tank fuel pump module in order to maintain the desired fuel line pressure.
The fuel system is an electronic returnless on-demand design. A returnless fuel system reduces the internal temperature of the fuel tank by not returning hot fuel from the engine to the fuel tank. Reducing the internal temperature of the fuel tank results in lower evaporative emissions.
The fuel tank stores the fuel supply. An electric turbine style fuel pump attaches to the fuel tank fuel pump module inside the fuel tank. The fuel pump supplies fuel through the fuel feed pipe to the high pressure fuel pump. The fuel pump also supplies fuel to a venturi pump located on the bottom of the fuel tank fuel pump module. The function of the venturi pump is to fill the fuel tank fuel pump module reservoir. The fuel tank fuel pump module contains a reverse flow check valve. The check valve maintains fuel pressure in the fuel feed pipe in order to prevent long cranking times.
Diagnostic Aids
Observe the Misfire Counters or perform the Fuel Injector Balance Test to help identify a leaking fuel injector.
Reference Information
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information Special Tools
CH 41769
Fuel Line Quick Disconnect Tool
EN 37287
Fuel Line Shut-off Adapter
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE:
Repair all fuel system related DTCs, except P2635, before performing this diagnostic.
Inspect the fuel system for damage or external leaks before proceeding.
Verify that adequate fuel is in the fuel tank before proceeding.
The Fuel Pump Enable may need to be commanded ON a few times in order to obtain the highest possible fuel pressure.
DO NOT perform the Fuel System Diagnosis if the engine coolant temperature is above 60°C (150°F). High fuel pressure readings may result due to hot soak fuel boiling. With the engine OFF, the fuel pressure may increase beyond the pressure relief regulator valve's setting point of 690 kPa (100 psi) ± 5 percent.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, command the Fuel Pump Enable On and Off several times with a scan tool.
2. Verify that the scan tool Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between 345 - 650 kPa (50 - 94 psi).
If less than 345 kPa (50 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Fuel Pressure Low.
If greater than 650 kPa (94 psi)
Replace the G12 Fuel Pump.
If between 345 - 650 kPa (50 - 94 psi)
3. Verify that the scan tool Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter, after the fuel pump is turned off, decreases to less than 600 kPa (87 psi).
If greater than 600 kPa (87 psi)
Replace the G12 Fuel Pump.
If less than 600 kPa (87 psi)
4. Verify that the scan tool Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter does not decrease greater than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 minute.
If greater than 34 kPa (5 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Fuel Pressure Leaks Down.
If less than 34 kPa (5 psi)
5. Engine running.
6. Verify that the scan tool Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter is between 379 - 427 kPa (55 - 62 psi).
If less than 379 kPa (55 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Fuel Pressure Low.
If greater than 427 kPa (62 psi)
Replace the G12 Fuel Pump.
If between 379 - 427 kPa (55 - 62 psi)
7. Verify that the scan tool Short Term Fuel Pump Trim and the Long Term Fuel Pump Trim when multiplied together are less than 1.5.
If greater than 1.5
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Fuel Pressure Low.
If less than 1.5
8. Verify that the scan tool Fuel Pressure Sensor and the Desired Fuel Pressure are within 45 kPa (6.5 psi) at 300 kPa (43.5 psi) request or 60 kPa (8.7 psi) at 400 kPa (58 psi) request of each other while operating the vehicle.
If greater than 45 kPa (6.5 psi)/60 kPa (8.7 psi)
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Fuel Pressure Drops Off.
If less than 45 kPa (6.5 psi)/60 kPa (8.7 psi)
9. If the fuel system components test normal, refer to Symptoms - Engine Controls, and Fuel Injector Diagnosis.
Circuit/System Testing
Fuel Pressure Low
1. Verify none of the conditions listed below exist:
Restricted fuel feed pipe
Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections.
If a condition exists
Repair as necessary.
If no conditions exist
Replace the G12 Fuel Pump.
Fuel Pressure Leaks Down
1. Vehicle OFF, relieve the fuel pressure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Relief .
2. Install the EN 37287 Adapter between the chassis fuel feed hose and the engine compartment fuel feed pipe.
3. Open the valve on the EN 37287 Adapter.
4. Vehicle in Service Mode, command the Fuel Pump Enable On and then Off with a scan tool.
5. Close the valve on the EN 37287 Adapter.
6. Verify that the scan tool Fuel Pressure Sensor parameter does not decrease more than 34 kPa (5 psi) in 1 min.
If greater than 34 kPa (5 psi)
Replace the G12 Fuel Pump.
If less than 34 kPa (5 psi)
Locate and replace the leaking Q17 Fuel Injector.
Fuel Pressure Drops Off
1. Verify none of the conditions listed below exist:
Restricted fuel feed pipe
Inspect the harness connectors and the ground circuits of the fuel pump for poor connections.
If a condition exists
Repair as necessary.
If no conditions exist
Replace the G12 Fuel Pump.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Fuel Feed Pipe Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Feed Intermediate Pipe Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Injector Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Pump Fuel Feed Hose Replacement
Refer to
Fuel Tank Fuel Pump Module Replacement
Perform the Fuel Pump Trim Reset procedure with a scan tool after the repair.
FUEL LEAK DIAGNOSIS
Reference Information
Special Tools
J-28428-E
High Intensity Black Light Kit
J-42220
Leak Detection Lamp
CAUTION: When performing a Fuel Leak Diagnosis, it is VERY IMPORANT to use only GM approved Oil Dye, Part Number 88861206. If any other oil dye is used, it will cause damage to the fuel injection system components, as well as the emission control components. This will result in necessary replacement of the damaged components.
1. Clean all of the fuel lines in the suspected area using brake cleaning solvent, and let dry.
2. Add 8 ounces of oil dye 88861206 to the fuel tank.
3. Start and idle the engine for 3 - 5 minutes.
4. Using a scan tool, increase the Fuel Rail Pressure, if applicable.
5. Verify there are no fuel leaks with J-28428-E or J-42220 around the:
Fuel pump
Fuel rails
Fuel injector supply lines
Fuel supply lines
Fuel return lines, if equipped,
High pressure or supply side fuel leak is found
Repair or replace the leaking component
If equipped, return side fuel leak is found.
1. Verify that the fuel return line is not restricted
If the fuel return line is restricted, repair or replace as necessary
If the fuel return line is not restricted, repair or replace the leaking component
No fuel leak is found
6. All OK.
FUEL INJECTOR DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies a separate high voltage supply circuit and a high voltage control circuit for each fuel injector. The injector high voltage supply circuit and the high voltage control circuit are both controlled by the ECM. The ECM energizes each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit. The ECM controls each fuel injector with 65 V. This is controlled by a boost capacitor in the ECM. During the 65 V boost phase, the capacitor is discharged through the injector high voltage supply circuit, allowing for initial injector opening. The injector is then held open with 12 V. A fuel injector coil winding resistance that is too high or too low will affect the engine driveability. The fuel injector coil windings are affected by temperature. The resistance of the fuel injector coil windings will increase as the temperature of the fuel injector increases.
Diagnostic Aids
Monitoring the scan tool Cylinder 1-4 Current Misfire Counters may help to isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition.
Operating the vehicle over a wide temperature range may help isolate the fuel injector that is causing the condition.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Fuel Injector Coil Test
NOTE:
The resistance test must be performed at the fuel injector or mis-diagnosis will occur.
The DMM and test leads must be calibrated to 0 Ω in order to prevent mis- diagnosis.
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the appropriate Q17 Fuel Injector.
2. Test for 1.35 - 1.65 Ω at 20°C (68°F) between the control + circuit terminal 1 and the control - circuit
terminal 2 at the Q17 Fuel Injector.
If not between 1.35 - 1.65 Ω
Replace the Q17 Fuel Injector.
If between 1.35 - 1.65 Ω
3. Test for infinite resistance between each terminal at the Q17 Fuel Injector and the Q17 Fuel Injector housing/case.
If less than infinite resistance
Replace the Q17 Fuel Injector.
If infinite resistance
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. Refer to Fuel Injector Replacement
FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Diagnostic Fault Information
Circuit |
Short to Ground |
Open/High Resistance |
Short to Voltage |
Signal Performance |
Fuel Injector 1 Control + |
P2147 |
P0201 |
P2148 |
P1248 |
Fuel Injector 1 Control - |
P0261 |
P0201 |
P0262, P2148 |
P1248 |
Fuel Injector 2 Control + |
P2150 |
P0202 |
P2151 |
P1249 |
Fuel Injector 2 Control - |
P0264 |
P0202 |
P0265, P2151 |
P1249 |
Fuel Injector 3 Control + |
P2153 |
P0203 |
P2154 |
P124A |
Fuel Injector 3 Control - |
P0267 |
P0203 |
P0268, P2154 |
P124A |
Fuel Injector 4 Control + |
P2156 |
P0204 |
P2157 |
P124B |
Fuel Injector 4 Control - |
P0270 |
P0204 |
P0271, P2157 |
P124B |
Circuit/System Description
The engine control module (ECM) supplies voltage to each fuel injector on the injector high voltage supply circuits. The ECM energizes each fuel injector by grounding the high voltage control circuit of the fuel injector. The ECM monitors the status of the injector high voltage supply circuits and the injector high voltage control circuits. When a fuel injector circuit condition is detected by the ECM, the affected fuel injector(s) is disabled.
Diagnostic Aids
Performing the Fuel Injector Diagnosis may help isolate an intermittent condition. Refer to
Fuel Injector
Diagnosis
.
If the condition is intermittent, move the related harnesses and connectors, with the engine operating, while monitoring the scan tool Injector Control Circuit Status parameters. An Injector Control Circuit Status parameter will change from OK or Not Run to Malfunction if there is a condition with the circuit or a connection.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Fuel System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
Circuit/System Verification
NOTE: Do Not perform this procedure unless directed here from the Fuel Injector Balance Test.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, engine running.
2. Verify the scan tool Cylinder 1 - 4 Current Misfire Counter parameters do not increment.
If the Cylinder 1 - 4 Current Misfire Counters increment
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the Cylinder 1 - 4 Current Misfire Counters do not increment
3. Verify the scan tool Cylinder 1 - 4 Injector Control Circuit Status parameters display OK.
If the Cylinder 1 - 4 Injector Control Circuit Status parameters do not display OK
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
If the Cylinder 1 - 4 Injector Control Circuit Status parameters display OK
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
1. Vehicle OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the appropriate Q17 Fuel Injector control + circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance
1. Disconnect the harness connector of the Q17 Fuel Injector.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the Q17 Fuel Injector control + circuit and ground.
If less than infinite, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
If infinite resistance
3. Test for infinite resistance between the Q17 Fuel Injector control - circuit and ground.
If less than infinite, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
If infinite, replace the Q17 Fuel Injector.
If infinite resistance
3. Vehicle in Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the Q17 Fuel Injector control + circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector of the Q17 Fuel Injector, vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the Q17 Fuel Injector control + circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 1 V, repair the short to voltage on the control - circuit.
If less than 1 V
5. Vehicle OFF.
6. Test for less than 3 Ω between the Q17 Fuel Injector control + circuit and control - circuit.
If 3 Ω or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector of the Q17 Fuel Injector.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω on the control + circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω
3. Test for less than 2 Ω on the control - circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the Q17 Fuel Injector.
If less than 3 Ω
7. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Fuel Injector Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for K20 Engine Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
ALCOHOL/CONTAMINANTS-IN-FUEL DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
Water contamination in the fuel system may cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, stalling, no start, or misfires in one or more cylinders. Water may collect near a single fuel injector at the lowest point in the fuel injection system and cause a misfire in that cylinder. If the fuel system is contaminated with water, inspect the fuel system components for rust or deterioration.
Ethanol concentrations of greater than 10% in non-blended gasoline or greater than 85% with E85 blended gasoline for flexible fuel applications can cause driveability conditions such as hesitation, lack of power, stalling, or no start. Excessive concentrations of ethanol used in vehicles not designed for it may cause fuel system corrosion, deterioration of rubber components, and fuel filter restriction.
Reference Information
Special Tool
CH 44175-A Alcohol Tester Kit, if available
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Verification
1. Remove a sample of fuel from the bottom of the fuel tank and place in a clean, clear container.
2. Place the sample on a level surface for 2 min.
3. Verify the sample is clear and bright in color.
If the sample appears cloudy, or contaminated with water, as indicated by a water layer at the bottom of the sample
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Particulate Contaminants in Fuel.
If alcohol contamination is suspected
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Alcohol in Fuel Testing.
If the sample remains clear and bright
4. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing
Alcohol in Fuel Testing with Special Tool, if Available
1. Test the fuel composition using CH 44175 - A Alcohol Tester Kit and Instruction Manual.
2. Verify no water appears in the fuel sample.
If water appears in the fuel sample
Clean the fuel system.
If no water appears in the fuel sample
3. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM in order to obtain the percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample.
4. Verify the non-blended gasoline fuel sample does not measure greater than 15% or an E85 blended gasoline fuel sample measures greater than 91% ethanol.
If greater than the specified value
1. Add fresh regular gasoline to the vehicle's fuel tank.
2. Remove a new sample of fuel from the tank.
3. Test the fuel composition using CH 44175 - A Alcohol Tester Kit and Instruction Manual.
4. Subtract 50 from the reading on the DMM in order to obtain the percentage of alcohol in the fuel sample.
5. Verify the non-blended gasoline fuel sample does not measure greater than 15% or an E85 blended gasoline fuel sample measures greater than 91% ethanol.
If additional testing indicates that the ethanol percentage is still above 15% for a non-blended gasoline sample, drain and replace the vehicle's fuel. Refer to
Fuel Tank Draining
.
If additional testing indicates that the E85 blended gasoline sample still measures above 91%, continue adding fresh, regular gasoline until the ethanol content is 85% or less.
If the specified value or less
5. All OK.
Alcohol in Fuel Testing without Special Tool
NOTE: This procedure is for non-blended gasoline only. If excessive alcohol content is suspected with E85 fuel add 15% tank volume of fresh, regular gasoline to the fuel tank.
1. Using a 100 ml (3.38 oz) specified cylinder with 1 ml (0.034 oz) graduation marks, fill the cylinder with fuel to the 90 ml (3.04 oz) mark.
2. Add 10 ml (0.34 oz) of water in order to bring the total fluid volume to 100 ml (3.38 oz) and install a stopper.
3. Shake the cylinder vigorously for 10 - 15 s.
4. Carefully loosen the stopper in order to release the pressure.
5. Re-install the stopper and shake the cylinder vigorously again for 10 - 15 s.
6. Put the cylinder on a level surface for approximately 5 min in order to allow adequate liquid separation. If alcohol is present in the fuel, the volume of the lower layer, which would now contain both alcohol and
water, will be more than 10 ml (0.34 oz). For example, if the volume of the lower layer is increased to 15 ml (0.51 oz), this indicates at least 5% alcohol in the fuel. The actual amount of alcohol may be somewhat more because this procedure does not extract all of the alcohol from the fuel.
7. Verify the non-blended gasoline fuel sample does not measure greater than 15%.
If greater than the specified value
1. Add fresh regular gasoline to the vehicle's fuel tank.
2. Remove a new sample of fuel from the tank.
3. Test the fuel composition of the new sample.
4. Verify the non-blended gasoline fuel sample does not measure greater than 15%.
If greater than the specified value, drain and replace the vehicle's fuel. Refer to
Fuel Tank
Draining
.
If the specified value or less, all OK.
If the specified value or less
8. All OK.
Particulate Contaminants in Fuel
1. Using an approved fuel container, draw approximately 0.5 liter (0.53 qt) of fuel from the bottom of the fuel tank.
2. Place the container on a level surface for approximately 5 min in order to allow settling of the particulate contamination. Particulate contamination will show up in various shapes and colors. Sand will typically be identified by a white or light brown crystals. Rubber will appear as black and irregular particles.
3. Verify there are no physical contaminants or water present in the fuel sample.
If any physical contaminants or water are present
Clean the fuel system.
If no physical contaminants or water are present
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.
Refer to
Fuel System Cleaning
Refer to
Fuel Tank Draining
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Reference Information
Special Tools
EN 41413-VLV
EVAP Service Port Vent Fitting
GE 41413-A
Evaporative Emission System Tester (EEST)
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Operating Instructions for the Evaporative Emission System Tester (EEST)
Vehicle Setup
WARNING: In order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury observe the following items:
Replace all nylon fuel pipes that are nicked, scratched or damaged during installation, do not attempt to repair the sections of the nylon fuel pipes
Do not hammer directly on the fuel harness body clips when installing new fuel pipes. Damage to the nylon pipes may result in a fuel leak.
Always cover nylon vapor pipes with a wet towel before using a torch near them. Also, never expose the vehicle to temperatures higher than 115°C (239°F) for more than one hour, or more than 90°C (194°F) for any extended period.
Apply a few drops of clean engine oil to the male pipe ends before connecting fuel pipe fittings. This will ensure proper reconnection and prevent a possible fuel leak. (During normal operation, the
O-rings located in the female connector will swell and may prevent proper reconnection if not lubricated.)
CAUTION: Use the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Tester GE 41413-A in order to provide a clean, dry, low pressure nitrogen gas source. Do not substitute any other pressurized source, gas or otherwise. Damage may result to the EVAP system, test equipment or cause a safety risk.
NOTE: A large difference between the vehicle temperature and shop temperature will seriously affect the accuracy of the tests. Always allow enough time, at least 15 m, for the vehicle temperature to adjust to the shop temperature.
NOTE: If the refueling request button is pushed then the vent solenoid valve will remain open for 30 min. The scan tool will be required to manually close the vent solenoid valve prior to testing and before the 30 min time expires. After 30 min the vent solenoid returns to it's natural closed state.
NOTE: If fuel level is 90% or greater it will take longer to fill the system with smoke because the fuel fill tube check valve will be closed and force any smoke to pass through the Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) pipe and orifice.
1. Vehicle in Service Mode, open the hood. Position a large fan to blow air under the vehicle onto the fuel tank area.
2. Connect the red battery clip from the tester to the positive battery terminal at the underhood auxiliary fuse
block X50B.
NOTE: The vehicle 12 V battery must be fully charged for optimal tester performance and because every module will be awake in this powered mode.
3. Connect the black battery clip of the tester to chassis ground.
Flow Meter Test - Leak Detection
CAUTION: Clean all of the following areas before performing any disconnections in order to avoid possible contamination in the system:
The fuel pipe connections
The hose connections
The areas surrounding the connections
1. Open the nitrogen tank valve and turn the nitrogen/smoke valve on the front control panel to nitrogen.
2. Connect the hose to the correct test orifice on the bottom front of the tester. For orifice size, refer to the vehicle specific information found in the service procedures for DTCs that relate to EVAP system leaks.
3. Press and release the remote switch to activate the tester.
NOTE: The tester will time out after about 15 min. You may press the remote switch to reactivate the tester as desired.
4. Position the sliding red flag on the flow meter to align with the floating indicator. When the red flag is set, press and release the remote switch to deactivate the tester.
5. Remove the hose from the test orifice and install the hose onto the vehicle. For proper connection location, and the special tool numbers for any adapters that may be required, refer to the service manual for the vehicle being tested. The vehicle specific information can be found in service procedures for DTCs that relate to EVAP system leaks.
6. Seal the EVAP system per instructions in the service manual. Most systems can be sealed using a scan tool output control for the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve. Other systems require that the system be plugged. Refer to the service manual for the vehicle being tested for specific instructions.
NOTE:
Larger volume fuel tanks, and/or those with lower fuel levels, may require several minutes to fill with nitrogen.
Static buildup may cause the float indicator to stick. It may be necessary to tap on the flow meter to free the float.
7. Press and release the remote switch to activate the nitrogen flow and fill the system.
8. Compare the stable floating indicator position to the red flag.
Below the red flag, the result is acceptable, Pass. Test complete
Above the red flag, the result is unacceptable, Fail. Go to the Smoke Procedure
9. Press and release the remote switch to deactivate the tester.
Smoke Procedure - Locate the Leak
NOTE: It is not recommended to use the tester in an outside repair bay area because wind and sunlight may affect temperature and your ability to see the smoke.
1. Turn OFF any fans that may cause air movement around or near the vehicle.
NOTE: Completely unwind the nitrogen/smoke hose from the bracket for optimal tester performance.
2. Connect the nitrogen/smoke hose to the vehicle as directed in the service manual. Some vehicles require that the nitrogen/smoke hose be connected at the front of the EVAP system at the EVAP service port. An adapter may be necessary. Other vehicles require the connection be made at the rear of the system using an adapter at the fuel fill cap. Consult the service manual for vehicle specific instructions regarding connection location and adapters.
3. Open the nitrogen tank valve and turn the nitrogen/smoke valve on the control panel to smoke.
NOTE: The remote switch operates in a push ON, push OFF fashion.
4. Press and release the remote switch to activate the tester and inject smoke into the EVAP system.
5. Verify smoke has filled the EVAP system by opening the system opposite the end where smoke is injected. When injecting smoke at the service port, remove the fuel fill cap and temporarily leave the EVAP canister vent solenoid valve open, and EVAP leak detection pump switching valve in the vent position, until smoke is observed. Then close the system and continue testing. If using a special tool fuel fill cap adapter at the filler neck, use the EN 41413-VLV at the service port until smoke is observed, then remove the EN 41413-VLV and continue with the test.
NOTE: Inject smoke in less than 2 min cycles for optimal tester performance.
6. Press and release the remote switch to deactivate the tester.
NOTE: For optimal visual smoke performance, deactivate the smoke flow and allow the system pressure to drop. Allowing the smoke to exit through small holes at a low flow rate greatly enhances visibility.
7. Introduce smoke into the system for an additional 60 s. Continue introducing smoke at 15 s intervals, as necessary.
8. Using a high-intensity white light, inspect the entire EVAP system path, and look for the source of the leak indicated by the exiting smoke. Introduce smoke at 15 s intervals, as needed, until the source of the leak is identified.
Temperature Variation Instructions
The Concern
Ideal circumstances for conducting the EVAP flow meter test require equal temperatures between the nitrogen gas and the vehicle EVAP system. Significant differences in temperature between them can result in a flow or pressure change during testing, causing misleading results. Typically, the evaporative emissions system tester is
stored indoors, approximately 21°C (70°F). Vehicles brought in for diagnosis may have an EVAP system at significantly different temperatures -40 to +43°C (-40 to +110°F).
For Example
NOTE: With no temperature difference between the nitrogen gas and EVAP system, the resulting vehicle EVAP system pressure will remain stable at 3.2 kPa, 13 in.
H2O, (0.5 PSI) once pressurized, providing no leaks are present.
When the EVAP flow meter tests are performed with significant differences in temperature between the nitrogen gas and the vehicle EVAP system, the following results can occur:
An increase in flow during the flow meter test can be caused by a vehicle's warm EVAP system cooling down.
A decrease in flow during the flow meter test can be caused by a vehicle's cool EVAP system warming up.
The Solution
When working on a vehicle with significant differences in temperature between the vehicle EVAP system and the nitrogen gas, allow the vehicle EVAP system temperature to stabilize as close as possible to the temperature of the nitrogen gas before conducting the Flow Meter Test.
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Description
Several states require that a vehicle pass on-board diagnostic (OBD) system tests and inspection/maintenance (I/M) emission inspections in order to renew license plates. This is accomplished by viewing the Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data display on a scan tool. Using a scan tool, the technician can observe the I/M status in order to verify that the vehicle meets the criteria that complies with the local area requirements.
While testing in the I/M System Status mode, some diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) may occur that are called I/M Test DTCs. An I/M Test DTC is defined as a DTC that is currently commanding the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ON, and is stored in non-volatile memory. The intended use of this data is to prevent vehicles from passing I/M inspection without proper repair to the vehicle. These DTCs are not erasable from any scan tool command or by disconnecting power to the controller. I/M Test DTCs are supported by all emissions related electronic control units (ECUs). For example, engine control modules (ECMs), transmission control modules (TCMs), and fuel pump control modules (FPCMs). An I/M Test DTC will not be stored or erased from the control module except at the end of trip processing which occurs 5 s after vehicle OFF.
Conditions for Updating the I/M System Status
NOTE: New vehicles may not report an Inspection/Maintenance System Check pass or fail status for certain post catalyst oxygen sensor or heated oxygen sensor 2 diagnostics prior to 700 miles. After replacing a catalytic converter on a vehicle with greater than 700 miles, it may require up to an additional 700 miles to prevent a false failure status.
Each system requires at least one, and sometimes several, diagnostic tests. The results of these tests are reported by a DTC. A system monitor is complete when either all of the DTCs comprising the monitor have Run and Passed, or any one of the DTCs comprising the monitor have illuminated the MIL. Once all of the tests are completed, the Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data will indicate YES in the Completed or Value column.
For example, when the HO2S Heater Status indicates YES, either all of the oxygen sensor heater tests have passed or one of the tests has illuminated the MIL. If the vehicle has four heated oxygen sensors, either all four heater circuit tests have passed or one of the heater circuit tests has illuminated the MIL. The Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data will indicate NO under the Completed or Value column when any of the required tests for that system have not run. The following is a list of conditions that would set the Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data indicator to NO:
The vehicle is new from the factory and has not yet been driven through the necessary drive conditions to complete the tests.
The 12 V battery has been disconnected or discharged below operating voltage.
The control module power or ground has been interrupted.
The control module has been reprogrammed.
The control module DTCs have been cleared as part of a service procedure.
Conditions for Clearing I/M Test DTCs
1. Only the OBD II System can erase I/M Test DTCs. The OBD II system must determine that the malfunction that caused the I/M Test DTC to be stored is no longer present and is not commanding the MIL. Each of the following represents ways to clear an I/M Test DTC:
If the MIL goes off due to 3 passing drive cycles, and the scan tool code clear is not used, the I/M Test DTC is erased at power down of the last drive cycle.
If a scan tool code clear is used to turn OFF the MIL, the I/M Test DTC is not erased, therefore the DTC must PASS and not FAIL during the drive cycle. The I/M Test DTC is erased at power down of the drive cycle.
If the controller is reflashed/reprogrammed, all I/M Test DTCs are erased.
2. For the OBD II System to run a single drive cycle for clearing an I/M Test DTC, all of the following conditions must occur:
Vehicle ON, engine run time greater than 600 s.
Cumulative vehicle speed is greater than 41 km/h (25 mph) greater than 300 s.
Continuous engine running, and vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 mph) greater than 30 s.
Vehicle OFF for 5 s.
Monitored Emission Control Systems
The OBD II system monitors all emission control systems that are on-board, but not all vehicles need every possible emission control system. For example, a vehicle may not be equipped with secondary air injection (AIR) or exhaust gas recirculation (EGR). The OBD II regulations require monitoring of the following; if equipped:
The air conditioning system
The catalytic converter efficiency
Comprehensive component monitoring - Emission related inputs and outputs
The evaporative emission (EVAP) system
The fuel delivery system
Heated catalyst monitoring
Misfire monitoring
The oxygen sensor system (O2S or HO2S)
The oxygen sensor heater system (HO2S heater)
For the specific DTCs required for each system, refer to Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System DTC Table. Systems such as misfire and comprehensive components may not be listed in a system status list. These tests run continuously and do not require an I/M System Status indicator.
Diagnostic Aids
The Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data display provides an indication of when the control module has completed the required tests. This does not necessarily mean that the test has passed, only that a decision was made. If the diagnostic fails, a DTC will indicate the failure. If a failure indication is present for a DTC associated with one of the I/M regulated systems, it may prevent other required tests from running. For example, a DTC for the control circuit of the EVAP purge solenoid may not be listed in the Inspection/Maintenance System DTC Table because it is a continuous test. If this DTC is set, the Active Tests for the EVAP system may not run.
The Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data information may be useful for a technician to determine if diagnostics have run when verifying repairs.
Circuit/System Verification
Vehicle in Service Mode, observe the scan tool Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data indicators, and the I/M Test DTCs. All I/M System Status indicators should display YES, and no I/M Test DTCs should be present.
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Many DTC related repairs will instruct the technician to clear the DTC information. Clearing the DTC will reset the Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data indicators to NO. Performing the I/M Complete System Set Procedure will set each of the I/M System Status indicators to YES.
1. Observe the Engine DTC information with a scan tool. Verify no I/M DTCs are present.
If an I/M DTC is set that would prevent the I/M System Status tests from completing, diagnose that
DTC before continuing. Refer to Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System DTC Table.
2. Review applicable service bulletins for software updates that would prevent the I/M System Status tests from completing.
If a control module re-program or other repair is required, perform the
Inspection/Maintenance
Complete System Set Procedure
.
3. Observe the Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data indicators.
If any Inspection/Maintenance System Status or Data indicators report NO, perform the
Inspection/Maintenance Complete System Set Procedure.
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE COMPLETE SYSTEM SET PROCEDURE
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Description
The purpose of the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) complete system set procedure is to satisfy the enable criteria necessary to execute all of the I/M readiness diagnostics and complete the trips for those particular diagnostics. When all I/M monitored diagnostic tests are completed, the I/M System Monitor Indicators are set to YES. Perform the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Complete System Set Procedure if any I/M System Monitor indicators are set to NO.
Conditions for Meeting a Cold Start
Ignition voltage between 10 - 32 V.
Barometric pressure (BARO) between 10 - 16 psi.
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) less than 40°C (104°F).
Intake air temperature (IAT) between 4 - 45°C (39 - 113°F).
Fuel level between 10 and 90%.
Circuit/System Verification
1. Verify that all I/M System Status indicators report YES, and that no I/M Test DTCs are present.
If any I/M Test DTCs are set
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If no I/M Test DTCs are set
2. All OK.
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System Set Procedure
WARNING: Refer to Road Test Warning .
NOTE: Since the internal combustion engine must run in order for the I/M
monitors to execute, it is suggested that the vehicle state of charge be depleted prior to performing the road test.
1. Vehicle ON, accelerate to a speed greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) with engine speed greater than 1800 RPM.
2. Maintain the vehicle speed and engine speed until the engine reaches normal operating temperatures.
3. Park vehicle and ensure that the vehicle meets the conditions for a cold start listed above.
4. Allow vehicle to sit undisturbed for a minimum of 8 hours.
5. Vehicle in Service Mode, observe the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Monitors with a scan tool. All of the I/M System Monitors should display YES.
If any of the I/M System Monitors display NO, refer to the
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System
DTC Table
for the monitor which did not display YES. The I/M System DTC Table identifies the DTCs associated with each I/M System Monitor.
NOTE: An I/M Test DTC will not be stored or erased from the ECU except at the end of trip processing, which occurs 5 s after Vehicle OFF.
6. Observe the I/M Test DTC information with a scan tool. Verify there are no I/M Test DTCs present.
If an I/M Test DTC is set, diagnose the DTC using the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List -
Vehicle
, and refer to
Inspection/Maintenance System Check
.
7. Observe the ECM DTC information with a scan tool. Verify no DTCs are present.
If a DTC is set, diagnose using the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
. After repairs, perform the
Inspection/Maintenance Complete System Set Procedure
to verify no further DTCs are set.
INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) SYSTEM DTC TABLE
System |
DTCs Required to Set System Status to YES |
If an I/M System Status indicator did NOT update to YES during the Inspection/Maintenance Complete System Set Procedure, review each indicator and reference this table to determine each DTC associated with the I/M System Status Indicator. Each DTC listed below has specific conditions that must be met for the diagnostic to run. Included within the conditions are additional DTCs which, if set, may inhibit the DTCs listed below from running. Reviewing and operating the vehicle within the Conditions for Running for each DTC listed below will allow the I/M System Status Indicators to transition to YES. |
|
Catalyst |
DTC P0420 |
EVAP |
|
Fuel |
DTC P219A |
Oxygen Sensor |
|
System |
DTCs Required to Set System Status to YES |
Oxygen Sensor Heater |
DTC P0030-P0032, P0036-P0038, P0053, P0054, P0135, or P0141 |
Camshaft Position |
DTC P0011 or P0014 |
ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Instructions
Perform the
Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
Review Strategy Based Diagnosis
for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
Refer to
Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
Circuit/System Description
This ignition system uses an individual coil for each cylinder. The engine control module (ECM) controls the spark events by transmitting the timing pulses on the ignition control (IC) circuits to the individual ignition coils in firing order sequence.
Diagnostic Aids
An open/high resistance on the low reference circuit to the ignition coil may cause a misfire.
An erratic or weak spark is considered a no spark condition.
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Engine Controls Schematics
Connector End View Reference
COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX
Description and Operation
Electronic Ignition System Description
Electrical Information Reference
Circuit Testing
Connector Repairs
Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Special Tools
EL 26792 HEI Spark Tester
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools (Diagnostic Tools) Special Tools (Repair Tools) .
Circuit/System Testing
NOTE: Do not perform this diagnostic procedure unless you were sent here from a misfire DTC or the Engine Cranks But Does Not Run diagnostic.
1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate T8 Ignition Coil. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 or A and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
If less than 5 Ω
3. Test for less than 5 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 2 or B and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 5 Ω
4. Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 4 or D and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ignition circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp illuminates
6. Vehicle OFF, exchange the suspect T8 Ignition Coil with the T8 Ignition Coil of a known functioning cylinder.
7. Engine Running.
8. Verify the scan tool Cylinder 1 - 4 Current Misfire Counter does not increment for the same cylinder that the suspect T8 Ignition Coil was removed from.
If increments
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If does not increment
9. Test or replace the T8 Ignition Coil.
Component Testing
NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Testing before proceeding with Component Testing.
1. Vehicle OFF, connect the EL 26792 HEI Spark Tester to the appropriate T8 Ignition Coil.
2. Engine Running.
3. Verify the spark output of the T8 Ignition Coil.
If no output or the output is weak
Replace the T8 Ignition Coil
If the output is good
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
Refer to
Ignition Coil Replacement
Refer to
Control Module References
for engine control module replacement, programming, and setup.